2018 Chrysler Pacifica Hybrid Owner&#39

2018 Chrysler Pacifica Hybrid Owner&#39
2018
OWNER’S MANUAL
Pacifica Hybrid
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2017 FCA US LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
4
5
SAFETY
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
5
6
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
6
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
7
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
8
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
9
10
MULTIMEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
10
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
11
12
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
12
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . . .6
▫ Essential Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
▫ Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
1
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured
that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. This Owner’s Manual has been
prepared with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty
Information, and customer oriented documents. In the
attached Warranty Booklet you will find a description of
the services that FCA offers to its customers, the Warranty
Certificate and the details of the terms and conditions for
maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of
these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for
the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will
help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and
transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on
different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve
with experience.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle.
Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or
versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore,
you should only consider the information which is related
to the trim level, engine, and version that you have
purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner’s Information, that may or may not be applicable to your
vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”.
All data contained in this publication are intended to help
you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA aims at
a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this
reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model
described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For
further information, contact an authorized dealer.
NOTE: After reviewing the Owner’s Information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
INTRODUCTION
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
5
Symbols
Consult the following table for a description of the symbols
that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this
Owner’s Manual:
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
CONTENTS
䡵 FRONT VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
䡵 REAR VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
䡵 INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
8 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
FRONT VIEW
Front View
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Hood/Engine Compartment
Headlights
Wheels/Tires
Windshield
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Charging Port Door
Exterior Mirrors
Doors
Fuel Door
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 9
REAR VIEW
2
Rear View
1 — Tail Lamps
2 — Rear Windshield Wiper
3 — Liftgate
10 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1
2
3
4
— Air Vents
— Multifunction Lever
— Instrument Cluster
— Windshield Wiper Lever
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Charge Indicator
Glove Compartment/Storage
Push Button Ignition
Steering Wheel
9 — Headlight Switch
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 11
INTERIOR
2
Interior Features
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Power Window/Door Lock Switches
Electronic Gear Selector
Uconnect Radio
Switch Panel
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Door Handle
Climate Control
Center Console
Seats
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
䡵 HIGH VOLTAGE CHARGING OPERATION . . . . . .20
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
▫ SAE J1772 Charging Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ AC Level 1 Charging (120V, 15 Amp). . . . . . . . . .20
▫ AC Level 2 Charging (240V, 30 Amp). . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Charging Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . . .51
▫ Vehicle Charge Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer Activation
— If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
▫ Hybrid Electric Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
䡵 KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
䡵 IGNITION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . .48
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
▫ Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped . . . .49
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .53
▫ How To Use Remote Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
3
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
▫ Easy Entry Slide Second Row Seating . . . . . . . . .76
䡵 DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
▫ Fold-Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
▫ Manual Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
▫ Second Row Removable Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
▫ Central Lock/Unlock — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .57
▫ Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
▫ Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
䡵 HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry . . . . . . . . .57
▫ Head Restraints — Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
▫ Manual Sliding Side Door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Head Restraints — Second Row . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
▫ Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped . . . . . . .62
▫ Head Restraints — Third Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
▫ Hands-Free Sliding Doors — If Equipped. . . . . . .65
䡵 STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
▫ Child Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .88
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped . . . . . . . .88
▫ Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
▫ Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) . . . . . . . . . . . .70
▫ Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped . .72
▫ Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . .89
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . . .90
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
▫ Conversation Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped. . . . . . . . .92
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . .93
䡵 EXTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . .95
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Automatic High Beam — If Equipped . . . . . . . .95
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Headlight Delay — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Lane Change Assist — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Battery Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
䡵 INTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Courtesy/Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS . . . . . . . .101
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .102
▫ Rear Wiper And Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
▫ Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped . . . . .96
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
3
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 WINDOWS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
▫ Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
▫ Power Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
䡵 TRI-PANE PANORAMIC SUNROOF —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .132
▫ Opening Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Closing Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Power Sun Shade — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .125
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
䡵 HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
▫ Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
▫ Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
▫ Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
▫ Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
䡵 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Power Inverter — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
▫ Cigar Lighter — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped . . . . . . . .142
▫ Overhead Storage With Sunglass Storage . . . . . .143
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .143
▫ Deploying The Crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
▫ Stowing The Crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY
High Voltage Battery Service Disconnect
Your vehicle is equipped with a Lithium-ion high voltage
battery that is used to power the electric powertrain
systems and the 12 volt vehicle electrical system.
The High Voltage Battery Service Disconnect is located
under the access panel, in front of the second row passenger seating.
The high voltage battery is located under the middle
section of the vehicle, below and in front of the second row
seating. The high voltage battery is maintenance free and
designed to last for the life of the vehicle.
If your vehicle requires high voltage battery service, see
your authorized dealer.
Lithium-ion batteries provide the following benefits:
• Lithium-ion batteries are much lighter than other types
of rechargeable batteries of the same size.
• Lithium-ion batteries hold their charge; they only lose
approximately 3 percent of their charge per month.
• Lithium-ion batteries have no memory, which means
that you do not have to completely discharge them
before recharging, as with some other batteries.
• Lithium-ion batteries can be recharged and discharged
thousands of times.
WARNING!
Never try to remove the high voltage service disconnect. The high voltage service disconnect is used when
your vehicle requires service by a trained technician at
an authorized dealer. Failure to follow this warning
can cause severe burns or electrical shock that may
result in serious injury or death.
Disposal of the High Voltage Battery
Your vehicle’s high voltage battery is designed to last the
life of your vehicle. See your authorized dealer for information on the disposal of the battery if it should require
replacement.
3
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The vehicle is also equipped with a Battery Management
System that is designed to:
• Ensure safe operation
• Maximize driving range
• Maximize the life expectancy of the high voltage battery
NOTE:
• During vehicle start up and shut down a clicking noise
may be heard from within the vehicle. When the ignition
is in the ON position, the high voltage battery contactors
inside the battery are closed to make the stored electricity inside available for vehicle use. The clicking noise
heard e sound of these contactors as they open and close
during normal operation.
• In extreme temperatures, high or low, the High Voltage
Battery may need to be conditioned and therefore may
require the vehicle to be plugged-in. When the vehicle is
not plugged-in, the following message, “Plug In Vehicle
for Battery Conditioning” might appear in the instrument cluster display. When the High Voltage Battery is
not ready to crank the vehicle at start up, due to
conditions including extreme temperatures, the message
“Battery Conditioning Leave Ignition In Run” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display. Keep the
ignition in the ON/RUN position for the battery to
recover. Switch the ignition back to the OFF position
when the message disappears, and then start the vehicle.
When the “Battery Conditioning Leave Ignition in Run”
message is displayed on the instrument cluster display,
do not operate any air conditioning controls.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
3
Battery Conditioning Instrument Cluster Display Message
Battery Conditioning Instrument Cluster Display Message
• Under cold or hot temperatures, while the vehicle is
plugged-in and the ignition is in the OFF position, the
vehicle may wake-up to pre-condition the high voltage
battery for usage.
The message will only be displayed when the ignition is in
the RUN position, or if there was a failed attempt to
achieve PSA (Propulsion System Available) is made when
the High Voltage Battery cell temperatures are either too
cold or too hot.
• It is recommended that the vehicle be plugged-in over
night where possible to maximize the electric range of
the vehicle.
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HIGH VOLTAGE CHARGING OPERATION
SAE J1772 Charging Inlet
Your vehicle uses an industry standard SAE J1772 charge
inlet (vehicle charge inlet) for both AC Level 1 (120V) and
AC Level 2 (240V) charging.
Portable Charging Cord Set (EVSE)
WARNING!
Vehicle Charge Inlet
AC Level 1 Charging (120V, 15 Amp)
Your vehicle is equipped with a 120 Volt AC, SAE J1772
Level 1 Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE), also
referred to as a charging cord set. AC Level 1 charging
requires a conventional NEMA 5-15 120 Volt AC grounded
wall receptacle along with the portable charging cord set
provided with the vehicle.
Shock, fire, property damage, or personal injury may
occur if the Portable EVSE Cordset is not used properly. There are no serviceable parts contained in the
Portable EVSE Cordset. Any attempt to service it may
result in shock, fire, property damage, or personal
injury.
To access the portable charging cord set, open the door of
the cargo area storage bin, on the driver’s side, and remove
the charging cord set from the storage bag.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
NOTE: After use, the EVSE should be placed in the carrier
bag and put back to the cargo area storage bin.
Cargo Area Storage Bin
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not put fingers or objects into the Charge Connector.
• Do not use this product if the flexible power cord or
Electric Vehicle (EV) Cable is frayed, broken, has
cracked insulation or any other signs of damage.
• Do not use this product if the enclosure or the
Charge Connector is broken, cracked, open, or shows
any other indication of damage.
• Do not use Portable EVSE Cordset with an extension
cord. Use of an extension cord may cause burns, fire,
or other damage or injury.
• This device may attempt to reset and run after an
interruption
EVSE Charging Cord Set
NOTE: The portable charging cord set is used for AC
Level 1 charging only.
WARNING!
• Read all the instructions before using this product.
• Unattended children must not have access to the
working Portable EVSE Cordset.
(Continued)
The EVSE charging cord set is compliant with SAE J1772,
and applicable for use with vehicles fitted with the standard SAE J1772 charge inlets. The EVSE includes:
• A Charge Connector
• A NEMA 6 rated enclosure with a charge current interrupt device (CCID) with status indicator display
3
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• An AC Power Cord with NEMA 5–15p, Right Angle
plug
• An indoor/outdoor charge cable, EV- rated
• A Status Indicator Display
Charging Cordset Operation
1. Plug the AC plug of the charging cordset into a 15 A, or
20 A, 120 VAC, 60 Hz, grounded wall receptacle. Do not
use an extension cord, outlet/plug adapter, or a worn
outlet. The charging cordset will not operate safely
unless it is plugged directly into the wall receptacle.
NOTE: The EVSE should be plugged into a dedicated
circuit, not a circuit shared with other devices drawing
electricity on the circuit.
Charging Cord Set
1 — Charge Connector
2 — Status Indicator Display
3 — Charging Cord Set Enclosure
4 — Charge Cable
5 — AC Plug
AC Plug And Wall Receptacle
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
WARNING!
Improper connection of the equipment-grounding conductor could result in a risk of electric shock. Check
with a qualified electrician or serviceman if you are in
doubt as to whether the wall receptacle is properly
grounded. Do not modify the plug provided with the
product – if it does not fit the outlet, you must have a
proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician.
2. Check to see if the charging cordset is ready to charge by
reviewing the indicator lights. After a brief self-check,
where the indicator light will flash, a green AC indicator
light and two green “charge active” indicator lights
indicate that the cordset is ready for use.
3
Cordset Indicator Lights
1 — AC Power Indicator Light
2 — Fault Indicator Light
3 — Charge Active Indicator
Lights
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. If the charging cordset is ready to charge, ensure the
vehicle is in PARK, and then connect the charge connector to the vehicle’s charge inlet. You will hear a “click”
when the charge connector is inserted correctly and
coupled with the vehicle’s charge inlet.
NOTE: The vehicle should start charging automatically. If
not, please check the following:
• Charging Cordset - The charging cordset status indicators illuminate green or red to identify the charging
cordset status. Refer to “Troubleshooting Using The
Status Indicator Display” in this section for further
information on the charging cordset status.
• Wall Receptacle – Check whether the wall receptacle is
functional (no power outage) and/or plug the charging cordset into a different wall receptacle.
Inserting The Charge Connector Into The Vehicle Charge
Inlet
4. When the vehicle commences charging, the Charge
Active Indicator Lights will cycle from left to right, and
then both turn off. This pattern will repeat while the
vehicle is charging. The lights are illuminated at the rate
of approximately one cycle per second.
• Charging Schedule – Check whether or not the charging schedules have been enabled. If enabled, check
that you are within the scheduled time and day of the
week. If a charging schedule has been enabled in the
vehicle, and it is outside the time and day of the week,
you may override the schedule for this charging event
by plugging in the charge connector, unplugging it,
and then plugging it back into the vehicle charge inlet.
Complete the double plug sequence within ten seconds for it to override the set schedule.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
5. To stop the charging process, disconnect the vehicle side
connector first and then the charging cordset from the
wall receptacle. To disengage the vehicle coupler, press
the button on the charge connector first and then
remove the connector from the vehicle charge inlet.
NOTE: It is good practice to keep the ignition in the OFF
position while conducting Level 1 Charging. This minimizes any additional vehicle loads the EVSE has to support. The additional electrical loads will extent the High
Voltage Battery charging time.
Troubleshooting Using The Status Indicator Display
If the vehicle is not charging properly, consult the status
indicator lights.
Removing The Charge Connector From The Vehicle
Charge Inlet
6. Close the inlet door when an EVSE is not connected to
the vehicle.
The AC Power Indicator displays the status and safety of
the input power. If this indicator is green, the power is
within acceptable limits to charge the vehicle. If only the
AC Power Indicator is flashing red, then there is a problem
with the AC power at the electrical outlet. If the AC Power
Indicator does not return to green, then the outlet should
be inspected by a licensed electrician to ensure the voltage,
frequency, and grounding are complaint to national and
local electrical codes and ordinances. It may be possible to
attempt charging from a different outlet.
3
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The Fault Indicator displays the status of the Portable
EVSE Cordset and the vehicle connection. The Portable
EVSE Cordset will not allow charging while the fault
indicator is red. If it is off, the Portable EVSE Cordset has
not detected any internal faults, or faults with the vehicle
connection. If the Fault Indicator is flashing red, there is a
fault detected either with the Portable EVSE Cordset,
electronics, or with the vehicle connection. The Portable
EVSE Cordset may attempt to retry to provide current to
the vehicle if the fault is cleared. If the Portable EVSE
Cordset does not attempt to provide charge to the vehicle,
the charge connector will need to be removed from the
vehicle to clear the fault.
The fault code list in the table below provides a reference
for the important faults that are detected by the Portable
EVSE Cordset. When a fault is detected, the AC Power
Indicator, the Fault Indicator, or both the AC Power and
Fault Indicators will flash red. If only the AC Power
Indicator is red, there is a problem on the AC Power side of
the unit. If only the Fault Indicator is flashing red, there is
a problem internal to the unit or with the vehicle. If both
the AC Power and Fault Indicators are flashing red, an over
temperature condition is detected at either the AC plug or
within the EVSE enclosure. Additional information about
the faults is provided by a fault code that is displayed on
the two green Charge Rate Indicators. The fault code
consists of four digits, each with a value of 1 or 2. The value
of a digit is the number of indicators illuminated for that
part of the sequence. For example, fault code (1, 2, 1, 1) will
display the following sequence: One indicator will illuminate for 0.3 seconds, then two indicators will illuminate,
then one indicator, and finally one indicator will illuminate. After all four fault code digits have been displayed,
the indicators will remain off for one second before repeating the sequence.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
Portable EVSE Cordset Fault Code List
Flashing
Fault
Code
1, 2, 2, 2
AC Power
1, 1, 2, 1
AC Power
1, 1, 2, 2
AC Power
Incorrect Electrical Supply
1, 2, 1, 1
AC Power
Incorrect Electrical Supply
1, 2, 1, 2
AC Power
Incorrect Electrical Supply
1, 1, 1, 1
Fault
Portable EVSE Cordset
Internal Fault
1, 1, 1, 2
Fault
Portable EVSE Cordset
Flashing
Indicator
Fault Indication
Recommended Actions
Vehicle Current Draw
is Too High
Incorrect Electrical Supply
Check Portable EVSE Cordset and Vehicle at a service location.
Attempt to charge the vehicle at a different outlet. Contact a
certified electrician to check the electrical outlet and AC Supply
(house wiring).
Attempt to charge the vehicle at a different outlet. Contact a
certified electrician to check the electrical outlet and AC Supply
(house wiring).
Attempt to charge the vehicle at a different outlet. Contact a
certified electrician to check the electrical outlet and AC Supply
(house wiring).
Attempt to charge the vehicle at a different outlet. Contact a
certified electrician to check the electrical outlet and AC Supply
(house wiring).
Unplug the Portable EVSE Cordset from the vehicle charge inlet
and retry to charge. If the issue is not corrected, check the Portable EVSE Cordset and Vehicle at a service location.
Unplug the Portable EVSE Cordset from the vehicle charge inlet
3
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Portable EVSE Cordset Fault Code List
Flashing
Fault
Code
Flashing
Indicator
Fault Indication
Recommended Actions
Internal Fault
and retry to charge. If the issue is not corrected, check the Portable EVSE Cordset and Vehicle at a service location.
Attempt to charge the vehicle at a different outlet. Contact a
certified electrician to check the electrical outlet and AC Supply
(house wiring).
Check Portable EVSE Cordset and Vehicle at a service location.
1, 2, 2, 1
AC Power
Outlet Wiring Bad
Ground
1, 2, 1, 1
Fault
1, 2, 1, 2
Fault
Portable EVSE Cordset
Internal Fault
CCID Leakage Current
Detected
2, 2, 2, 1
Fault
Vehicle Interface Connector
2, 2, 2, 2
Fault
Vehicle Interface Connector
1, 1, 2, 1
Fault & AC
Power
EVSE Enclosure Internal Temperature is Too
High
Disconnect charge connector and retry charging. If problem persists, check the Portable EVSE Cordset and Vehicle at a service
location.
Error with the Vehicle Charge Connector Interface — Check for
water or other contamination in the vehicle charge inlet or
charge connector.
Error with the Vehicle Charge Connector Interface — Check for
water or other contamination in the vehicle charge inlet or
charge connector
Use caution as the Portable EVSE Cordset housing may be hot.
It is recommended to move the Portable EVSE Cordset out of
direct sun exposure. Allow the unit to cool. If error persists,
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
Portable EVSE Cordset Fault Code List
Flashing
Fault
Code
Flashing
Indicator
Fault Indication
1, 1, 1, 2
Fault & AC
Power
Hot AC Power Plug
Warning
1, 1, 1, 1
Fault & AC
Power
AC Power Plug Over
Temperature
Recommended Actions
check the Portable EVSE Cordset at a service location.
Use caution as the Portable EVSE Cordset AC Power Plug may
be hot. It is recommended to carefully unplug the unit from the
wall outlet and allow it to cool down. Attempt to charge the
vehicle at a different wall outlet. Contact a certified electrician
to inspect/replace the wall outlet that was associated with the
Hot AC Plug event. Charging will still occur, but at a reduced
rate.
Use caution as the Portable EVSE Cordset AC Power Plug may
be hot. It is recommended to carefully unplug the unit from the
wall outlet and allow it to cool down. Attempt to charge the
vehicle at a different outlet. Contact a certified electrician to
inspect/replace the outlet that was associated with the Hot AC
Plug event.
FCC Notice:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
3
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This unit complies with ICES-003E of Industry Canada,
and EMC Directive 2004/108/EC.
Guidelines for preventing fire and electric shock:
• Ensure the charging cable is positioned so it will not be
stepped on, tripped over, or otherwise subjected to
damage or stress.
• There are no user serviceable parts inside.
• Do not use the charging cordset if it is visibly damaged.
Contact your authorized dealer for service.
• Do not place fingers, or any other objects inside the
charge connector.
• Do not allow children to operate this device. Adult
supervision is mandatory when children are in proximity when the charging cordset is in use.
NOTE: During normal operation, the charge connector or
AC plug may feel warm. If either one feels hot during
charging, unplug the charging cordset and have a qualified
electrician inspect the wall receptacle before you continue
charging.
WARNING!
Do not use the charging cordset with a receptacle that
is worn or damaged. Using the charging cordset with a
worn or damaged receptacle may cause burns or start a
fire.
AC Level 2 Charging (240V, 30 Amp)
AC Level 2 (240 V) charging requires a 240 V, Level 2 EVSE
(Charging station). A 30 A Level 2 EVSE for home installation is recommended.
When using public charging stations, ensure the charging
station is ready to provide charge and the vehicle is in
PARK before the charge connector is plugged into the
vehicle’s charge inlet. You will hear a “click” when the
charge connector is inserted correctly and is coupled with
the vehicle’s charge inlet. The vehicle should start charging
automatically. If not, please check the instructions at the
charging station.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
NOTE: The vehicle should start charging automatically. If
not, please check the following:
• Charging Station – Check the indications and instructions at the charging station or
• Charging Schedule – Check whether the charging schedule is enabled and if so, whether the vehicle is currently
within the scheduled charge time/day (weekday/
weekend). If the charging schedule is enabled within the
vehicle, you may override them for this charging event
by plugging in the charge connector, unplugging it, and
then plugging it back into the vehicle charge inlet.
Complete the double plug sequence within ten seconds
for it to override the set schedule.
To stop the charging process:
• Press the “STOP” button located on the front of the
EVSE station.
• Press the button on the charge connector first and then
remove the connector from the vehicle charge inlet
• Plug the charge handle into the EVSE station and coil the
charging cord onto its holder. Do not leave the charging
cord laying on the ground.
Charging Times
The following factors determine the time it takes to charge
the high voltage battery:
• The high voltage battery’s current state of charge
• The type of EVSE used (Level 1 - 120V or Level 2 – 240V)
• Ambient temperature
• Whether the vehicle is ON during charging
NOTE:
• The charging times below are estimates based on charging a high voltage battery that has a 0% SOC value
displayed in the instrument cluster.
• Charging times will vary based on the age, condition,
state of charge, available current being provided to the
charger from its energy source, and temperature of the
high voltage battery.
• Charging times may be longer if a thermal selfprotection reduces the charging current from the EVSE.
• If the vehicle’s ignition is in either the ACC or RUN
position, the vehicle charge indicator may not indicate
greater than a 99% state of charge, and will continue to
charge the vehicle, due to the vehicle loads.
3
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Type of EVSE
Level 1 (120V/15A)
Level 2 (240V/30A)
Estimated Charge Time
Approximately 14 hours
Approximately 2 hours
Vehicle Charge Indicators
Instrument Cluster High Voltage Battery Display
Instrument Panel State Of Charge Indicator
In addition to the battery display, your vehicle is equipped
with a visual state of charge indicator. The state of charge
indicator is made up of five lights that are mounted to the
top center of the instrument panel, which will illuminate
when the vehicle is plugged into the EVSE.
When plugged in, the batter also gives the battery level
along with messaging charge or waiting to charge on
schedule, unless there is a charging fault. A red plug telltale
will be shown in the cluster, as well as applicable messaging.
State Of Charge Indicator
The state of charge indicator provides a visual indication of
the high voltage battery’s charge status during charging.
It’s also used to indicate a charging problem, as well as,
waiting for a schedule charge to begin.
High Voltage Battery Display
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
NOTE: The lights scroll one at a time when the vehicle is
plugged in outside of its charging schedule time/day of
the week, and it is waiting on the schedule to begin
charging.
In the event of an error in the charging process the outer
two lights will blink.
Number Of Indicator
Lights Illuminated
1st light blinks
1st light ON, second light
blinks
1st and 2nd lights ON,
3rd light blinks
1st, 2nd, and 3rd light
ON, 4th light blinks
1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th
light ON, 5th light blinks
All 5 lights ON
Two outer lights are
blinking
Lights turn on one at a
time from left to right
Percent Of Battery Charge
Number Of Indicator
Lights Illuminated
(when looking at the
front of the vehicle)
All lights light up, and
then turn off immediately
Percent Of Battery Charge
charge schedule to begin
charging
Indicates a successful plugin.
Hybrid Electric Pages
0 – 20%
21 – 40%
41 – 60%
61 – 80%
81 – 99%
100%
Indicates an error in the
charging process.
Indicates system is waiting
for scheduled time in
Within your Uconnect 4C/4C NAV radio is the “Hybrid
Electric Pages” App that allows you to see your vehicle’s
power flow, understand your drive history, and set an
EVSE charging schedule for your vehicle’s high voltage
battery. To access this app, press the “Apps” button on the
main menu bar of the radio’s touch screen, and locate the
“Hybrid Electric” App. Pressing the “Hybrid Electric
Pages” App will bring you to a set of three pages: Power
Flow, Driving History, and Charging Schedule
3
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• Battery - Shows the amount of power (in kW) the high
voltage battery is currently providing/absorbing. A
negative kW indicates the vehicle’s high voltage battery
is charging.
• Climate - Shows the amount of power (in kW) the
climate control system is using to maintain the current
interior temperature.
Hybrid Electric Pages App Location
Power Flow
The first screen within the “Hybrid Electric Pages” App is
the Power Flow screen. The Power Flow screen shows the
current power readings for all of the following:
• Engine - Shows the amount of power (in kW) the engine
is generating. Based on vehicle operating conditions, this
power is used to: propel the vehicle, provide passenger
compartment heating & cooling, power vehicle electrical
loads, and charge the High Voltage Battery. Engine
operation is controlled to maximize fuel economy.
Power Flow Screen
Power Flow paths are indicated by the direction of the
arrows on the touchscreen.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Driving History
The second screen in the “Hybrid Electric Pages” App is
the Driving History screen. The Driving History screen
shows the miles (km) driven in both Full Electric and
Hybrid modes for both the previous week and the current
week. The data is displayed in a bar graph: Electric Mode
miles in teal and Hyrbid Mode miles in blue.
3
On the bar graph, miles (km) driven on the same day in
Electric mode (battery only) are always shown below miles
(km) driven in Hybrid mode. When one day of the week
exceeds 100 miles (160 km) driven, the values of miles (km)
driven in Electric and Hybrid modes will be listed above
the bar graph in respective colors (teal for Electric and blue
for Hybrid).
Driving History Screen
Charging Schedule
The third screen within the “Hybrid Electric Pages” App is
the Charging Schedule screen. From this screen you can set
when you want you vehicle to charge. To do so, press the
check box next to the setting “Enable Schedule” until a
check mark appears in the box, from there you can push
the ‘Weekdays’ or ‘Weekends’ schedule to adjust the start
and end time of desired charging. You can also choose
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
“Charge Until Full” instead of choosing an end time,
allowing the vehicle to continue to charge for an amount of
time after the start time until the vehicle is fully charged, as
long as the vehicle is plugged in. The Charging Schedule
can also be set using the Uconnect App on your smartphone.
NOTE: If the charging schedule is not enabled, the vehicle
will charge whenever plugged in. It is not necessary to set
up the charging schedule to charge the vehicle.
Charging Schedule Screen
NOTE: If the vehicle is plugged in outside of the charging
schedule set in the Uconnect 4C radio, the vehicle’s battery
will not charge. Charging will only begin immediately if
the vehicle is plugged in within the time and day of the
week set in the schedule. Otherwise, charging will automatically begin when the selected charge time/day of the
week occurs or whenever the vehicle is plugged in with no
charge schedule set.
If the vehicle is turned off outside of the charging window,
a radio pop-up message will be displayed, which provides
an option to begin charging the vehicle immediately. The
pop-up message asks the driver if they would like to
“Charge Now?” and provides other information, including
the next charging schedule start time and estimated time to
charge the battery to 100%. If within one hour of selecting
“Yes,” the vehicle is connected to a powered EVSE, the
vehicle will immediately begin to charge (temporarily
ignoring any set charge schedule). To fully deactivate the
charge schedule, refer to the “Charging Schedule” feature
within the “Hybrid Electric Pages” App.
The charging schedule can also be overridden if the EVSE
is plugged in, unplugged, and then plugged in a second
time to the vehicle. This “double plugged-in” feature will
override the schedule that is set in the radio, and begin
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
charging the vehicle immediately. The double plug sequence must be completed within ten seconds for it to
override the programed schedule.
KEYS
NOTE: The emergency key allows for entry into the
vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go
dead. The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key with
you when valet parking.
Key Fob
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The ignition
system consists of a key fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) and a START/STOP push button ignition system.
The Remote Keyless Entry system consists of a key fob and
Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if equipped.
NOTE: The key fob may not be found if it is located next to
a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these
devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal.
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, and activate the Panic Alarm, optional power
liftgate, left power sliding door, and right power sliding
door from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using
a hand-held key fob. The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
Three Button Key Fob
3
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Four Button Key Fob
Five Button Key Fob
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
3
Six Button Key Fob
Seven Button Key Fob
To Unlock The Doors
NOTE: Uconnect Settings lets you program the system to
unlock either the driver’s side doors on the first push
(default) or unlock all doors on the first push of the unlock
button on the key fob. To change the default setting, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver front door and sliding door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The
hazard lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.
The illuminated entry system will be activated.
Second Push Unlock
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s side doors or all doors on the first push of the
unlock button on the key fob. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
First Push Unlock
2nd Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will be activated.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer
to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Emergency Key Feature
The key fob also contains and an emergency key, which
stores in the bottom of the key fob.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors and liftgate. The hazard lights will flash once and the
horn will chirp once to acknowledge the signal. Settings in
radio can change to lights only, chirp only, or both.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Key Fob With Remote Control And Integrated Vehicle
Key
Mechanical Latch To Release Emergency Key
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. The
emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the glove
compartment. You can keep the emergency key with you
when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, press the mechanical button
on the side of the key fob with your thumb and pull the
emergency key out with your other hand while pushing
the mechanical button.
If one or more doors are open or the liftgate is open, the
doors can be locked. This is signaled by a quick flash of the
turn signals.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the
doors can be locked. The doors will unlock again only if the
key is inside the passenger compartment.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
3
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Batteries contain harmful chemicals. Dispose old batteries by placing them in correct containers according to the
law or by taking them to a dealership, where they will be
handled appropriately.
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by pushing the mechanical
release button on the side of the key fob with your
thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Insert a coin, a flat blade screw driver, or the tip of your
emergency key into the now exposed slot and carefully
pry on both sides to disengage the snaps. Gently remove
the back cover from the fob being careful not to damage
any of the snaps.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Programming Additional Key Fob
If you do not have a programmed key fob, contact your
authorized dealer for details.
Request For Additional Remote Controls
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
3. Remove the battery by sliding the battery rearward in its
pocket until the battery lifts up. Remove the depleted
battery from the battery pocket and dispose appropriately.
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
4. Fit a new CR2032 battery ensuring that the positive (+)
side is facing upwards. Push the battery into the pocket
until it is firmly seated in place and secured under both
tabs.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
5. Align the back cover into its original position and snap
it back in place by pushing it against the fob until it is
seated all around.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
dealer.
Separating The Key Fob Case
3
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KeySense Features — If Equipped
This feature provides the vehicle owner with the ability to
customize vehicle settings that can be applied to determine
the driving experience for other drivers of the vehicle. The
vehicle settings are protected by a unique 4-digit PIN,
which the vehicle owner creates when accessing the specific settings for the first time.
This feature also has additional features that are always
enabled when the specific key is in use that cannot be set
by the vehicle owner. While this specific key fob is in use,
the vehicle will respond accordingly to the customized
vehicle settings and mandatory features. This includes
enhanced driving assistance features, increased driver
alerts, and the locking of certain optional features.
KeySense Key Fob
KeySense Unique Splash Screen
At start-up the KeySense splash screen should inform the
driver that the vehicle will be functioning in KeySense
mode when the KeySense key is in use.
Start Up Display Features
• Unique splash screen graphic
• Telltale
illuminated
• After unique splash screen, and after stored messages
are cycled, then start-up KeySense messages (Range &
Max Speed) are displayed
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
The following features are always enabled when this key is
in use:
• Entertainment Audio Muted if 1st row occupied Seat
Belts are not Fastened
• Consistent Seat Belt Unfastened Chime
• Maximum Radio Volume limited to 15 out of 39
• Daytime Running Lights
For additional information please refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
This feature allows the driver to start the vehicle with the
push of a button, as long as the key fob is in the passenger
compartment, and the drivers foot on the brake pedal.
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with an automatic shutdown feature. If the vehicle is left in “READY” state
(vehicle running) with shifter in “PARK” for one hour, it
will automatically turn off the vehicle. Notifications have
been designed into this feature to raise awareness of the
timed event. The instrument cluster display will display
“Ready to drive” accompanied with three audible chimes
while exiting. The interior warnings will occur regardless if
the key fob remains in the vehicle or is removed. The horn
will sound three times if the fob is removed from the
vehicle and the ignition state is in “READY” mode. To
restart the vehicle, follow the normal process for starting
your vehicle.
3
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start RUN
will illuminate.
NOTE:
• Pushing ignition Start/Stop button may only activate
the Electric Propulsion System and not start the vehicle.
⬙READY⬙ will show in cluster whenever vehicle is
operating in EV (Electric Vehicle) Mode and the vehicle
is stationary.
• If the vehicle ignition is in either ACC or RUN, the
vehicle charge indicator may not display a value greater
than 99% state of charge due to vehicle loads.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
The ignition can be placed in the following positions:
OFF
• The vehicle is stopped.
• Some electrical devices are available.
ACC
• Some electrical devices are available.
• Mechanical power (Vehicle Propulsion) is not available.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
ON/RUN
• Driving position.
• All the electrical devices are available.
START
• As long as the ⬙Ready⬙ appears in the instrument cluster
display it does not matter if the engine is running or not,
vehicle propulsion is available.
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead battery. In
this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the
ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE
START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition
switch.
Conditions Causing Engine To Run
• Maintaining Hybrid Battery SOC
• Provide Maximum Vehicle Acceleration
• Provide Maximum Passenger Compartment Heating
• Maintain Exhaust System Catalyst Temperature (after
engine start in current ignition cycle - emissions requirement)
• Engine Temporarily Operating in “Fuel and Oil Maintenance Mode”
• Hood Opened with Ignition in Run Post-Start Mode
(eliminate unexpected engine start-ups)
Keyless Push Button Ignition
3
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE: If the brake is pressed and the ignition is placed in
the RUN position with an EVSE connected to the vehicle,
the instrument cluster will not display the Ready state.
When the Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE) is
unplugged from the vehicle, the vehicle will go into the
“Ready” state. If the vehicle is not shifted out of Park 30
minutes after being unplugged, the vehicle will disable the
“Ready” state. After an additional 30 minutes with no
change in Ignition status, the Ignition shall go to OFF and
the vehicle shall power down. For further information,
refer to ⬙Starting The Engine⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙
for further information,
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: Remote start on Hybrid while plugged in may
not always start the engine. Temperature dependent.
This system uses the key fob to start the vehicle
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
328 ft (100 m).
The Remote Starting System also activates the Climate
Control, vented seats (if equipped) in temperatures above
80° F (26.7° C), the optional heated seats, optional heated
steering wheel, optional heated mirrors and rear defroster
in temperatures below 40° F (4.4° C).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
NOTE:
How To Use Remote Start
• Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
vehicle will remote start:
• While plugged in the remote start feature for the vehicle
may not always start the engine. Temperature dependent.
• Gear Selector in PARK
Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote
start prematurely:
• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open (Prior to remote
start attempt)
• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position.
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• Key fob PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
• MIL lamp is OFF, Vehicle is in propulsion system active
3
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the
turn signals will flash twice, and the horn will chirp twice.
Then the vehicle will start, and the vehicle will remain in
the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• The vehicle can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) from the key fob. However, the ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position before you
can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window operation is disabled when
the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the Remote Start button one time or allow
the remote start cycle to complete the entire 15-minute
cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable the one time push of the Remote Start button for
two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock
the vehicle using Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via
the door handles, and disarm the vehicle security alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
push and release the START/STOP button.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Keyless EnterN-Go — Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will display in the instrument
cluster display until you push the ignition START button.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
When Remote Start is activated, the Climate Control,
vented seats (if equipped) are also activated in temperatures above 80° F (26.7° C), and the optional heated seats,
and optional heated steering wheel in temperatures below
40° F (4.4° C). These features will stay on through the
duration of Remote Start or until the ignition switch is
cycled to the ON/RUN position.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer Activation
— If Equipped
SENTRY KEY
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 40° F (4.4° C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will be enabled. Exiting Remote Start will
resume previous operation, except if the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer is active. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and
operation will continue.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
operation by disabling the vehicle. The system does not
need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses key fob to prevent unauthorized vehicle
operation. Therefore, only key fob that are programmed to
the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid
key fob is used to start the engine.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position,
the vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for
a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
3
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to start the
engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Customer Key Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at your authorized dealer.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
NOTE: Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming
a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors for
unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the interior
switches for door locks, power sliding doors and power
liftgate are disabled. The vehicle security alarm provides
both audible and visible signals. If something triggers the
alarm, the vehicle security alarm will provide the following
audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park
lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the vehicle
security light in the instrument cluster will flash.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn the horn off
after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8 cycles if
the trigger remains active and then the vehicle security
alarm will rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
position (refer to ⬙Starting The Engine⬙ in ⬙Starting And
Operating⬙ for further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry, make sure the vehicle ignition system is
OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push lock on the interior power door lock switch with
the driver and/or passenger door open.
3
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for further
information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on the
key fob cannot arm or disarm the vehicle security alarm.
To Disarm The System
• The vehicle security alarm remains armed during power
liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will not disarm
the vehicle security alarm. If someone enters the vehicle
through the liftgate and opens any door, the alarm will
sound.
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
• Hands Free Liftgate passive entry activation (if
equipped with Hands Free Liftgate passive entry).
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry, push the keyless ignition START/STOP
button (requires at least one valid key fob in the
vehicle).
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior
lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for further
information).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
DOORS
Manual Lock
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door
trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door lock
button until the ribbing is visible. To unlock the rear doors,
rotate the door lock button until the red indicator is visible.
3
Manual Door Lock Rocker Switch
Manual Front Door Lock Location
1 — Manual Door Lock
2 — Door Handle
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Manual Rear Door Lock Location
1 — Door Handle
2 — Manual Door Lock
If the door lock button is locked (no ribbing is visible)
when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the
liftgate.
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Central Lock/Unlock — If Equipped
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel.
Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
allow the locks to operate. A chime will sound if the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position and a door is
open, as a reminder to place the ignition in the OFF
position and remove the key fob.
Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit — If Equipped
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks
all of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. This will
occur only after the gear selector has been placed into the
PARK position, after the vehicle has been driven (the gear
selector has been placed out of PARK and all doors closed).
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not
operate if there is any manual operation of the door locks
(lock or unlock).
Driver Power Door Lock Switches
1 — Power Unlock Switch
2 — Power Lock Switch
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door is
open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you
from accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Placing
the ignition in the OFF position or closing the door will
For further information, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia”.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless
Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock
or unlock buttons.
3
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower
response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and
if equipped will arm the security alarm.
(low beams, license plate lamp, position lamps) for the
time 0, 30(default), 60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry also
initiates two flashes of the turn lamps.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver’s door
handle, grab the driver’s front door handle to unlock the
drivers side doors (driver/sliding door) automatically. The
interior door panel rocker knob will rotate when the door
is unlocked.
• The sliding side doors can be unlocked from the outside
using the hands free or Passive Entry system.
• The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle
keyless-go system if it is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop or other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
passive entry system from locking or unlocking or
starting the vehicle.
• If set by the customer in the Uconnect Settings, unlocking with Passive Entry will initiate illuminated approach
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all
doors and liftgate will unlock when you grab hold of the
driver’s front door handle. To select between “Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,”
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger
door handle, grab the front passenger door handle to
unlock all four doors and the liftgate automatically. The
interior door panel lock knob will rotate when the door is
unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”
or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Key Fob In Vehicle
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is
equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which
will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with Passive Entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search
in any Passive Entry vehicle:
• A lock request is made by a valid key fob while a door
is open.
• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle
while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are
shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a
key fob inside the car, and it does not find any key fob
outside the car, then the car will unlock and alert the
customer.
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
key fob is detected inside the vehicle, and no valid key fob
is detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
the doors when any of the following conditions are met:
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
• There is a valid key fob outside the vehicle and within 5
ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry door handle.
3
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
NOTE: On the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the
key fob can be locked in the vehicle.
To Enter The Liftgate
With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, cycle
the handle to open the liftgate and pull the liftgate open
with one fluid motion.
NOTE: If “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” is programmed,
only the liftgate will unlock when the liftgate release
handle is pulled. If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all doors and the liftgate will unlock when the
liftgate release handle is pulled. To select between “Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,”
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s key fobs within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver or passenger front door handle, push the door
handle lock button to lock all four doors and the liftgate.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Manual Sliding Side Door
The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the
outside. Pull outward on the exterior handle to open the
sliding door. The sliding door inside handle functions by
rocking forward and back. Rocking the handle backwards
opens the door and rocking forward releases the hold open
latch in order to close the door.
NOTE: If equipped with the power sliding side doors, refer
to “Safe Lock — If Equipped” in this section to turn the
power off for manual operation of the sliding side doors.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob
lock button, or the lock button located on the vehicle’s
interior door panel.
3
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the
sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your
sliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding
door after the hold-open latch is activated, you must
rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the
exterior handle.
Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched
anytime the vehicle is in motion.
NOTE: The left side sliding door cannot be opened while
the fuel door is open.
Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped
Side Door Handle And Lock Functions
1 — Door Handle
2 — Door Lock
To keep your door operating properly, observe the following guidelines:
• Always open the door smoothly.
• Avoid high impacts against the door stop when opening
the door. This is very important when your vehicle is
parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in the
downhill direction.
The power sliding door may be power opened or closed in
several ways:
• Key fob
• Inside or outside handles
• Buttons located:
– In the overhead console
– Just inside the sliding door
– On the outside handle
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Push the button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to open, close, or reverse a power sliding
door.
The key fob and the overhead console button will operate
the door when the door is locked. All other ways require
the sliding door to be unlocked. If the vehicle is equipped
with Passive Entry, pressing the button on the outside
handle or Hands-Free feature (if equipped) will unlock and
open the sliding door, with a valid Passive Entry key fob
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle.
Overhead Console Control Buttons
There are power sliding side door switches located on the
B-Pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door
for the rear seat passengers.
To operate the sliding door manually with the handles or to
avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding doors
from the rear seats, push the power sliding door power off
button, located in the overhead console, to remove power
to the handles and buttons just inside the sliding doors.
The power off LED, in the overhead console, will be lit
when the handles are manual. When the LED is lit, pushing
the power sliding door power off button will return the
handles to power operation.
3
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Tones are sounded when the sliding door reverses
movement and upon activation of the hands-free feature (if
so equipped). The turn signals are flashed with sliding
door movements. These alerts can be turned on or off in
‘Uconnect Settings’.
Passenger Side Power Sliding Side Door Switch
NOTE:
Driver Side Power Sliding Side Door Switch
• If anything obstructs the power sliding side door while
it is closing or opening, the door will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it meets
sufficient resistance.
• If the power sliding door stops in the middle due to
obstacles, it powers open on the next command.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
WARNING!
Hands-Free Sliding Doors — If Equipped
Personal injury or cargo damage may occur if caught in
the path of the sliding door. Make sure the door path is
clear before closing the door.
3
WARNING!
Before driving off, check the instrument cluster for a
sliding door or door open message or warning indicator. Failure to do this could result in unintentionally
leaving the sliding door open while driving.
Hands-Free Sliding Doors
To open the Hands-Free Sliding Doors, use a straight in
and out kicking motion under the vehicle in the general
location below the door handle(s). Do not move your foot
sideways or in a sweeping motion or the sensors may not
detect the motion.
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the sliding door
will chime, the hazard lights will flash and the sliding door
will open almost instantaneously. This assumes all options
are enabled in the radio settings.
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock
• To open the Hands-Free Sliding Doors requires a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door
handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is not within 5 ft
(1.5 m), the door will not respond to any kicks.
1. Open the sliding side door.
• The Hands-Free Sliding Door will only operate when the
transmission is in Park.
2. On the rear of the sliding door, slide the Child Protection
Door Lock control inward (toward the vehicle) to engage the Child Protection Door Lock.
• If anything obstructs the Hands-Free sliding doors while
it is opening, the sliding doors will automatically reverse
to the closed position, provided it meets sufficient
resistance.
• If the power sliding doors encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle, the system will automatically stop.
The Hands-Free Sliding Doors feature may be turned off
through Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information. The Hands-Free
Sliding Doors feature should be turned off during Jacking,
Tire Changing, and Vehicle Service.
Child Locks
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a Child
Protection Door Lock system.
Child Protection Door Locks
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
NOTE:
To Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock
• After engaging (or disengaging) the Child Protection
Door Lock, always test the inside door handle with the
sliding door closed to make certain the Child Protection
Door Lock is in the desired position. The inside door
handle will not open the sliding door when the Child
Protection Door Lock is engaged.
1. Open the sliding side door.
• The power sliding door will operate from the switch
located just inside the sliding door, regardless of the
Child Protection Door Lock lever position. To avoid
unintentional operation of the power sliding door
from the rear seats, push the sliding door power Off
button, located in the overhead console, to engage Safe
Lock. When the overhead console power OFF LED is lit,
the sliding door may not be power opened or closed by
pushing the buttons just inside the sliding doors or
pulling on the handles.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the sliding doors cannot be opened
from the inside door handle when the Child Protection
Door Locks are engaged.
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward
(away from the vehicle) to disengage the Child Protection Door Lock.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.
NOTE:
• After disengaging (or engaging) the Child Protection
Door Lock, always test the inside door handle with the
sliding door closed to make certain the Child Protection
Door Lock is in the desired position. The inside door
handle will open the sliding door when the Child
Protection Door Lock is disengaged.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
(Continued)
3
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Manual Front Adjuster
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Seat Adjustment
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Handle
2 — Height Adjustment
3 — Recline Lever
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
3
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Manual Recline Lever
Seat Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pump the
lever upward to raise the seat height or pump the lever
downward to lower the seat height.
Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped
For models equipped with manual seats, the recline lever is
located on the outboard side of the seat.
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever and push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Rear Seat Adjuster
Both second row seats are adjustable forward or rearward.
The manual seat adjustment handle is located under the
seat cushion at the front edge of each seat.
Manual Seat Adjuster
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or
death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
3
Manual Recline
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, and push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
seats for the driver and front passenger. The power seat
switches are located on the outboard side of the seat. The
switches control the movement of the seat cushion and the
seatback.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Driver Power Seat Switches
1 — Seat Switch
2 — Seatback Switch
3 — Lumbar Switch
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward, and the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the rear of seat switch, the
seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in two
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
3
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or
downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
Heated Seats
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings. The
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO
and none for OFF.
• Press the heated seat button
setting ON.
once to turn the HI
• Press the heated seat button
the LO setting ON.
a second time to turn
• Press the heated seat button
heating elements OFF.
a third time to turn the
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of
continuous operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting
will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
• The vehicle must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the first row seat cushions are small fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep
the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient
temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button
the ventilated seat OFF.
a second time to
a third time to turn
NOTE: The vehicle must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a remote
start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
3
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Easy Entry Slide Second Row Seating
2. Slide lever upwards to unlock the seatback.
The second row seats can be tilted and slid forward for
easy entry into the third row.
1. Located in the seatback of the second row seat is a lever
that provides easier access to the third row by tilting the
seat forward.
Easy Tilt Seat Lever
Easy Tilt Seat Lever Location
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
3. Push on seatback to slide seat forward to access the third
row.
Fold-Flat
To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full upward
position and push the seatback forward until it rests on the
seat cushion.
Easy Tilt Seat
4. To put the seat back into original position, just pull back
on the seatback and lock the seat into position.
Fold-Flat Seat Recline Lever
WARNING!
NOTE: The seatback may lock into the fold flat position.
Use the recline lever to unlock the seatback.
Do not use this feature with a child in seat. Serious
injury or death my occur.
3
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Second Row Removable Seat
The Easy Entry Slide second row seating does not stow in
the floor, but they are removable for added cargo space.
3. The release strap is located on the front of the seat, near
the floor.
Removing Seat
1. Adjust seat to the full rearward position.
2. Lift the recline lever to fold the seatback flat against the
seat cushion.
Seat Release Strap
4. To remove the seat, pull the release strap to release the
rear latches.
Fold-Flat Seat Recline Lever
NOTE: Push downward on the seatback to make sure it is
in the locked position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
5. Tilt the back of the seat to the upward position.
3
Seat Removal
Tilt Seat Forward
6. The seat assembly can now be removed from the
vehicle. Grab the front seatback edge located near the
head restraint and the grab bar on the rear side of the
seat cushion for easy removal.
Reinstalling Seat
1. To reinstall the seat, align the seats front attachments
into the detent positions on the floor.
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If Equipped
1. Lower the center head restraint down to the seatback by
pushing the button on the guide and pushing the head
restraint down.
2. Pull release strap marked “1” to release the anchors.
In Floor Seat Detents
2. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seat back into its original
position.
NOTE: Push downward to ensure the rear latches are in
the locked position.
3. Lift the recline handle and return the seat back to the
seating position.
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could become loose.
Personal injuries could result.
Release Strap “1”
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
3. Pull release strap marked “2” and tumble the seat
rearward into the storage bin.
3
Stowed Third Row Seat
Strap “2”
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Unfold Third Row Seats
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the
storage bin and push the seat forward until the anchors
latch.
Strap “2”
3. Raise the head restraint to its upright position.
WARNING!
Assist Straps
2. Pulling strap “2” releases the seatback to return to its
full upright position.
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully latched.
• Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the head restraints are in
their upright positions when the seat is to be occupied.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head Restraints — Front Seats
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
four-way head restraints.
3
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Front Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint. Front head restraints are
also adjustable forward and rearward. To adjust the head
restraint forward, pull forward on the top of the head
restraint to desired position. To adjust the head restraint
rearward, pull forward on the head restraint to furthest
forward position and head restraint will reset to furthest
rearward position.
Forward Adjustment
Normal Position
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Full Forward Position
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can
go. Then, push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to
fully remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and
push downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
3
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Head Restraints — Second Row
The second row outboard head restraints are adjustable. To
raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint.
To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button,
located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can
go then push the release button and the adjustment button
at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up.
Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to fully remove the
head restraint. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then,
adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
Head Restraints — Third Row
The outboard head restraints can be manually folded
forward for improved rearward visibility. Pull the release
strap to fold them forward.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
NOTE: To remove the center head restraint, raise it as far as
it can go. Then, push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then,
using the adjustment button, adjust the head restraint to
the appropriate height.
Release Strap
NOTE:
• The head restraints must be raised manually when
occupying the third row.
• Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third
row seats.
The head restraint in the center position can be raised and
lowered for tether routing or height adjustment. Refer to
“Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
Adjustment Button
3
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located left of
the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it will operate for an
average of 80 minutes or more before automatically shutting off. This time may vary depending on the temperature
of the environment. The heated steering wheel can shut off
early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is
already warm.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
The heated steering wheel control button is located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
the heating element on.
once to turn
• Press the heated steering wheel button
to turn the heating element off.
a second time
NOTE: The vehicle must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a
remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is used to allow the driver to
adjust up, down and left, right. Mirror should be adjusted
to center on the view through the rear window.
3
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Manual Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by
pushing the button at the base of the mirror. A light to the
left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right of the
button does not illuminate.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
Outside Mirrors
Conversation Mirror
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of
the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Located in the overhead console there is a conversation
mirror to view all the passengers in the vehicle. Push the
panel to release the drop down mirror. Raise the mirror and
push to latch it back in the stowed position.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other
object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror
adjusts.
Conversation Mirror
3
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side
door trim panel.
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
• Full forward position
• Full rearward position
• Normal position
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate
Controls” for further information.
Power Mirror Controls
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons
and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror,
push either the L (left) or R (right) to select the mirror that
you want to adjust.
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, pushing
the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the
normal driving position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: fold and unfold them
by pushing the button. (this may require multiple button
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To
use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the folding feature will be disabled.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle speed
is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they will
automatically unfold.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
Illuminated Mirror
3
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
Multifunction Lever
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. The switch controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, interior
lights and the fog lights.
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column. The multifunction lever controls the turn
signals, headlight high/low beams, and flash-to-pass functions.
Headlight Switch
Multifunction Lever
1 — Turn Signals
2 — Flash-To-Pass
3 — Headlight Beams Low/High
1
2
3
4
— Rotate Headlight Switch
— Ambient Dimmer Control
— Instrument Panel Dimmer
— Fog Lamps Button
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the second detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
Rotate the headlight switch to the third detent for headlight, parking light and instrument panel operation.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The headlights or LED light bars on your vehicle will
illuminate when the vehicle is started. This provides a
constant lights on condition until the ignition is turned
OFF. If the parking brake is applied, the Daytime Running
Lights (DRL) will turn off. Also, if a turn signal is activated,
the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle will turn off
for the duration of the turn signal activation. Once the turn
signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
High/Low Beam Switch
When the headlights are turned on, pushing the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel will switch from
low beams to high beams. Pulling back to the neutral
position returns the headlights to the low beam operation.
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam system provides increased
forward lighting at night by automating high beam control
through the use of a digital camera mounted on the
windshield. This camera detects vehicle specific light and
automatically switches from high beams to low beams
until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE: Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights
to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens
will cause the system to function improperly.
To Activate
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON” through the
Uconnect system. Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
2. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the AUTO
position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to the high beam position. Refer to
“Multifunction Lever” in this section for further information.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is at,
or above 16 mph (25 km/h).
To Deactivate
Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the
Automatic High Beam system.
3
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — OFF” through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF.
To turn the Automatic System off, turn the headlight switch
counterclockwise to the O (off) position.
2. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the
headlights from the high beam to the low beam position.
NOTE: The vehicle must be running before the headlights
will come on in the Automatic mode.
3. Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise from the
AUTO to the on position.
Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped
NOTE: Once active, the Automatic High Beam system will
stop functioning below 12 mph (20 km/h).
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and
remain on until the lever is released.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns your headlights on or off
based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn
the headlight switch to the extreme clockwise position
aligning the indicator with the AUTO on the headlight
switch. When the system is on, the Headlight Time Delay
feature is also on. This means your headlights will stay on
When your headlights are in the AUTO mode and the
vehicle is running, the headlights will automatically turn
on when the wiper system is also turned on. Headlights on
when windshield wipers are on may be found on vehicles
equipped with an automatic headlight system.
NOTE: The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned
on or off through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Headlight Delay — If Equipped
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle.
To activate the delay feature, turn the ignition OFF while
the headlights are still on. The 90 second delay interval
begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the headlights or parking lights are turned back on or the ignition
switch is turned ON, the delay will be cancelled.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have the
headlights remain on for 30, 60, or 90 seconds or not remain
on. To change the timer setting, select the proper setting
through the Uconnect System.
3
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The headlights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or the parking lights are left on after the
ignition switch is turned OFF, a chime will sound when the
driver’s door is opened.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or
the low beam headlights and push in the headlight switch
control knob. Pushing the headlight switch control knob in
a second time will turn the front fog lights off.
Fog Light Switch
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signal Warning
INTERIOR LIGHTS
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled
at over 18 mph (29 km/h) for about 1 mile (1.6 km) with the
turn signals on, a chime will sound and a message will
display in the cluster to alert the driver.
Courtesy/Interior Lighting
The courtesy light switches are used to turn the courtesy
lights on/off.
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three
times then automatically turn off.
Battery Protection
This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing
down the battery if the headlights or parking lights are left
on for extended periods of time when the ignition switch is
in the LOCK position. After eight minutes of the ignition
switch being in the LOCK position and the headlight
switch in any position other than OFF or AUTO, the lights
will turn off automatically until the next cycle of the
ignition switch or headlight switch.
The battery protection feature will be disabled if the
ignition switch is turned to any other position other than
LOCK during the eight minute delay.
Courtesy Light Switches
To operate the courtesy lights, push either the driver’s or
passenger light switch.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
NOTE:
• Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the interior
lights are turned off. This will prevent the battery from
discharging once the doors are closed.
3
• If a light is left on, it will automatically be turned off
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition is in the
STOP/OFF position.
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Located above the rear passengers are courtesy/reading
lights. The lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door
or the liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with
remote keyless entry the lights will also turn on when the
unlock button on the key fob is pushed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Push the
lens to turn these lights on while inside the vehicle. Push
the lens a second time to turn each light off.
Reading Lights
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or downward
to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambient light
located in the overhead console, door handle lights, under
I/P lights, door map pocket lights, and cubby bin lights.
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
increase or decrease the brightness of the instrument panel.
At the top detent of the instrument panel dimmer, all the
interior lights will also illuminate. At the bottom most
setting (extreme bottom) interior lights are turned off
(dome off), and the cluster, radio and instrument lighting
go to their lowest dimmable setting.
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
Interior Lighting Off
Rotate the right (instrument panel) dimmer control to the
off position (extreme bottom). The interior lights will
remain off when the doors or liftgate are open.
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the headlight switch, and is located on the driver’s side of the
instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward or downward to
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the
first detent. This feature brightens all text displays such as
the odometer, instrument cluster display, and radio when
the position lights or headlights are on.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS
Windshield Wiper Operation
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within
the wiper lever. Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the
first detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed
wiper operation. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the
second detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed
wiper operation.
NOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off and
the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to the
wiper motor may occur.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Intermittent Wiper System
Washer And Wiper Controls
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make
a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles
desirable. Rotate the end of the wiper lever to the first
detent position, and then turn the end of the lever to select
the desired delay interval. There are four delay settings,
which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a
minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of
approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is
10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
3
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while on
the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate
for several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the
lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off position, the
wipers will operate several wipe cycles, then turn off.
Mist Feature
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever upward to the MIST position and release for a single wiping
cycle.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of the four
intermittent wiper sensitivity settings to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the multifunction lever. Wiper sensitivity position 3 has been calibrated for best overall wiping sensitivity. If the operator
desires more wiping sensitivity, they may select sensitivity
position 4. If the operator desires less wiping sensitivity,
they may select sensitivity positions 2 or 1. Place the
multifunction lever in the OFF position when not using the
system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried saltwater is present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce rain sensor performance.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is first
switched ON, when the vehicle is stationary and the
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the
vehicle speed becomes greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or
the outside temperature rises above freezing.
• Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will
not operate when the ignition is ON, when the transmission gear selector is in the NEUTRAL position and the
vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h), unless the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the
vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the gear
selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are not
operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode.
Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing wiper
operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other
inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
Rear Wiper And Washer
Rear Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring upwards to
operate one of two modes for the rear window wiper:
• First detent — intermittent mode.
• Second detent — continuous mode.
Rear Windshield Washer Operation
Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward activates the
rear window washer. If the lever is pushed while on the
intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for
several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the
lever is pushed while the wipers are in the off position, the
wipers will operate several wipe cycles, then turn off.
3
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Heating and A/C are only available with the
vehicle running, unless the vehicle is plugged in.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Overview
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Temperature Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
Control Descriptions
Icon
Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. The A/C can be deselected
manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation
mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode
is not recommended.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information.
3
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon
Rear Climate
Description
Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates
when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When
the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the front defrost mode is turned
off the climate system will return the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster
is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
Rear Climate Control Button
Press and release this button to access the rear climate controls. The indicator will illuminate when
the rear climate controls are on.
Driver and Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on
the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button
on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
Icon
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen
Buttons
Description
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC indicator
is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. The SYNC feature also synchronizes the rear passengers’ temperature to the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are
seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on
the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the
lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon
to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area
between the icons.
3
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon
Modes Control
Panel Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Description
Modes Control
Push the button in the center of the knob to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located
below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109
Icon
Floor Mode
Mix Mode
Description
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Controls off.
3
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
only Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if
needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of
the radiator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is
on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
setting and MAX A/C to exit.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity,
or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate
interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button.
The Recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is selected. Press the button a second time to turn off
the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the
vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed
out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the front ATC Panel and the
word “AUTO” will illuminate in the front ATC display,
along with two temperatures for the driver and front
passenger. The system will then automatically regulate
the amount of airflow.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to
maintain, by adjusting the driver, passenger, and rear
temperatures. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE: It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as
possible.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage
immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by changing
the front blower knob setting.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
3
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front ATC Panel
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
• Press the ⬙REAR CLIMATE⬙ button on the touchscreen
to change control to rear control mode, Rear display
(below) will appear. Control functions now operate rear
system.
• To return to the Front screen on the Uconnect radio,
press the ⬙Front Climate⬙ or “Done” button on the
touchscreen.
Icon
REAR AUTO
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Front ATC Panel Rear Control
Display
Description
Rear Auto Button
Automatically controls the rear interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and
automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information.
Rear Lock Button
Press and release to lock out the rear manual temperature controls from adjusting the rear temperature and blower settings.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113
Icon
Description
Front Climate Button
Press and release this button to change the display on the Uconnect radio back to the Front Climate Controls.
Rear Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Push the up arrow button
on the touchscreen to increase the temperature. Push the down arrow button on the touchscreen
to decrease the temperature. When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s temperature will
move up and down with the driver’s temperature.
SYNC Button — If Equipped
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the rear passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. The SYNC feature also synchronizes the
front passenger’s temperature to the driver temperature setting. Changing the rear passenger
temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to
manual operation. The speeds can be selected using the buttons on the touchscreen.
3
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon
Panel Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Floor Mode
Description
Rear Passenger Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls off.
Panel Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Panel Mode. In
Panel Mode, air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be
individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard
outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut
off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Bi-Level Mode. In
Bi-Level Mode, air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Floor Mode. In Floor
Mode, air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets underneath the
passengers’ seats, and overhead outlets at each outboard
rear seating position. The system provides heated air
through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air through
the headliner outlets.
3
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned
off.
The rear ATC system is located in the headliner, on the
passenger side of the vehicle.
Rear Automatic Climate Controls
1. Adjust the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the Rear
Modes to suit your comfort needs.
2. ATC is selected by pushing the AUTO button.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC System
will automatically achieve and maintain that comfort level.
When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not
necessary to change the settings. You will experience the
greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically.
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The
system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and
fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
Icon
Description
Rear Mode Control
Push this button on the Rear Climate Hard Controls to change the air distribution mode for the
rear passengers to one of the following:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Floor Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of
the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 117
Icon
Description
Rear Temperature Control
• Rear Passenger Temperature Up Button To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
push temperature control up button to raise the temperature. The rear temperature settings
are displayed in control head.
• Rear Passenger Temperature Down Button To change the temperature in the rear of the
vehicle, push temperature control down button to lower the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in control head.
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control can be manually set to off, or any fixed blower speed by pushing the
blower control buttons. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated
in the rear of the vehicle. The larger of the two icons increases blower speed, whereas the smaller
of the two icons decreases the blower speed.
AUTO Button — If Equipped
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information.
Rear Climate Control/Blower Off
To manually set the rear blower controls to off, press the Rear Climate Control/Blower Off button.
3
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) with deionized, or distilled water for proper corrosion protection is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended, because it may
cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e.,
vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do
not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from
the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin
air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 119
Operating Tips Chart
3
WINDOWS
Power Windows
You can control either the front or rear windows using
controls located on the driver’s door trim panel.
The driver may lock out the rear power windows by
pushing the bar control just below the power window
controls.
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The controls will operate only when the ignition switch is
in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power
accessory delay.
Front Passenger Power Door Controls
1 — Window Open/Close
2 — Power Door Locks
Driver’s Power Window Controls
1 — Front Driver And Passenger Window Controls
2 — Rear Passenger Window Controls
3 — Power Window Lockout Switch — If Equipped
NOTE: Power Window controls will also remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned
to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay setting. Opening a front door will cancel this feature.
There is a single control on the front passenger’s door trim
panel which operates the passenger door window and a set
of controls that lock and unlock all doors. The controls will
operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN
or ACC position and during power accessory delay.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 121
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
WARNING!
The front driver and front passenger controls may be
equipped with an Auto Up feature. Lift the window control
fully upward to the second detent, release, and the window
will go up automatically.
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear
your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the
window path before closing.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the control briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window control to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
Auto Up Reset — If Equipped
To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the following
steps after vehicle power is restored:
NOTE:
1. Pull the window control up to close the window completely and continue to hold the control up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
• If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window control again
to close the window.
2. Push the window control down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the control down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during autoclosure. If this happens, pull the control lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
Sliding Side Door Power Window Control — If
Equipped
Second row passengers may open and close the sliding
door window by a single control on the door handle
assembly.
3
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The controls will operate only when the ignition switch is
in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power
accessory delay.
NOTE: The controls will not operate if the driver has
activated the Power Window Lockout.
Sliding Door Power Window Control
NOTE: The sliding door windows do not fully open,
stopping several inches above the window sill.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the rear windows are open and
buffeting occurs, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 123
TRI-PANE PANORAMIC SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The Tri-Pane Panoramic Sunroof switch is located to the
left between the sun visors on the overhead console.
The Power Shade switch is located to the right between the
sun visors on the overhead console.
Tri-Pane Panoramic Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
1 — Sunroof Switch
2 — Power Shade Switch
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
3
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof
Express Mode
Push the switch rearward and release it within one second.
The sunroof will open automatically from any position and
stop at the full open position. This is called “Express
Open.” During Express Open operation, any other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
opening to the Vent position.
Closing Sunroof
Express Mode
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
open switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
opening.
Push the switch forward and release it within one second
and the sunroof will close automatically from any position.
The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is
called “Express Close.” During Express Close operation,
any other actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Mode
Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward to
full open. Any release of the switch will stop the movement. The sunroof will remain in a partially opened
condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed
condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Wind Buffeting
Push and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one second and
the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called
“Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of sunroof
position.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 125
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
Power Sun Shade — If Equipped
Opening Power Shade — Express Mode
Push the shade switch rearward and release it within one
second and the shade will open automatically from any
position. The shade will open and stop automatically at the
half-open position. Push the shade switch rearward again
and release it within one second and the shade will open
automatically to the full-open position. This is called
“Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any
other actuation of the shade switch will stop the shade.
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
To open the shade, push and hold the switch rearward. The
shade will open and stop automatically at the half-open
position. Push and hold the shade switch rearward again
and the shade will open automatically to the full-open
position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement
and the shade will remain in a partially opened condition
until the switch is pushed again.
Closing Power Shade — Express Mode
Push the switch forward and release it within one second
and the shade will close automatically from any position. If
the sunroof is completely closed the shade will close fully
and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”.
During Express Close operation, any other actuation of the
switch will stop the shade.
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
half-open position. Pushing the shade close button again
will automatically close both the sunroof and shade completely.
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the forward
position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement
and the shade will remain in a partially closed condition
until the switch is pushed again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing of the
sunroof during the Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
3
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the
sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the OFF/LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
HOOD
Opening
WARNING!
Always cycle the ignition to OFF mode before opening
the hood. If the ignition is in ON mode and the
Propulsion System is active when the hood is opened,
the engine will automatically start, and persons not
clear of the vehicle could be seriously injured by the
engine’s moving parts.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 127
The hood release lever (to open the primary latch) and
safety latch (to open the secondary latch) must be released
to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the driver’s
side of the instrument panel.
3
Safety Latch Location
4. Remove the support rod from the locking tab and insert
it into the seat located on the underside of the hood.
NOTE:
Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the outside of the front of the vehicle.
3. Push the safety latch release lever toward the passenger
side of the vehicle. The safety latch is located behind the
center front edge of the hood.
• Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms are not
in motion and not in the lifted position.
• While lifting the hood, use both hands.
• Vehicle must be at a stop and the automatic transmission
must be in park.
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Closing
LIFTGATE
1. Hold up the hood with one hand and with the other
hand remove the support rod from its seat and reinsert
it into the locking tab.
Opening
2. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm) from
the engine compartment and drop it. Make sure that the
hood is completely closed.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate may be released in several ways:
• Overhead console liftgate button
• Key fob
• Outside handle
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to release the liftgate.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
Unlock Liftgate Using An Key Fob
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 129
The key fob and the overhead console button will release
the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The outside handle
requires the liftgate to be unlocked. If the vehicle is
equipped with Passive Entry, pulling the outside handle
will unlock and release the liftgate, with a valid Passive
Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate.
Closing
To Close The Liftgate
Grasp the liftgate closing handle and initiate lowering the
liftgate. Release the handle when the liftgate takes over the
closing effort.
To Lock The Vehicle
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, pushing the passive entry lock button located to
the right of the outside handle will lock the vehicle.
WARNING!
Unlock Liftgate Using Passive Entry
NOTE: If 1st Press of key fob Unlocks “All Doors” is
programmed in Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock with
a Passive Entry handle activation. If 1st Press of key fob
Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed in Uconnect Settings,
the liftgate will only unlock with handle activation. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do
not use the recirculation mode.
3
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened or closed in several
ways:
• Overhead console liftgate button
• Key fob
• Outside handle (opens liftgate only)
• Button just inside the liftgate on the upper left trim
(when liftgate is open)
• Hands-Free Liftgate (opens liftgate only) — If Equipped
Using the above ways:
• When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate will open
• When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will close
• When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will reverse
Push the Power Liftgate button on the Overhead Console
to open or close the liftgate.
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to open or close the liftgate.
Overhead Console Power Switches
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Liftgate
Right Sliding Door
Sliding Door Power Off
Left Sliding Door
The key fob and the overhead console button will operate the
liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The outside handle
requires the liftgate to be unlocked. If the vehicle is equipped
with Passive Entry, depressing the touch pad on the outside
handle or Hands-Free Liftgate foot activation (if equipped)
will unlock and open the liftgate, with a valid Passive Entry
key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate handle.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 131
NOTE:
• To open the liftgate, the Hands-Free Liftgate foot activation (if equipped) requires a valid Passive Entry key fob
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle.
3
• If 1st Press of key fob Unlocks “All Doors” is programmed in Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock
with a Passive Entry hands-free activation. If 1st Press of
key fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed in
Uconnect Settings, the liftgate will only unlock with
hands-free activation.
• Tones are sounded and the turn signals are flashed with
liftgate movements. These alerts can be turned on or off
in Uconnect Settings.
• Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
To Close The Liftgate
The liftgate can also be closed using the Rear Interior
Power Liftgate button (If Equipped), located in the upper
left trim in the liftgate opening.
Rear Interior Power Liftgate Switch
Lock The Vehicle
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, pushing the passive entry lock button located to
the right of the outside handle will lock the vehicle.
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped
NOTE: To open the Hands-Free Liftgate requires a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle.
If a valid Passive Entry key fob is not within 5 ft (1.5 m), the
liftgate will not respond to any kicks.
CAUTION!
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be turned on or
off in Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information. The HandsFree Liftgate feature should be turned off during
Jacking, Tire Changing, and Vehicle Service.
NOTE:
Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone
To open the liftgate using hands-free activation, use a
straight in and out kicking motion under the vehicle
activation zone in the general location below the liftgate
door handle. Do not move your foot sideways or in a
sweeping motion or the sensors may not detect the motion.
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the liftgate will
chime, the hazard lights will flash and the liftgate will open
after approximately one second. This assumes all options
are enabled in the radio.
• The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate when the
transmission is in Park.
• If anything obstructs the Hands-Free liftgate while it is
opening, the liftgate will automatically reverse to the
closed position, provided it meets sufficient resistance.
• There are pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these
strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open
position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 133
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be operated manually.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position. However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it
may be necessary to assist the props when opening the
liftgate in cold weather.
• The power liftgate will release, but not power open, in
temperatures below −12° F (−24° C). Be sure to remove
any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before
opening the liftgate.
NOTE: Allow the power system to open the liftgate.
Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the
liftgate obstacle detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction.
• If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
power liftgate functionality.
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do
not use the recirculation mode.
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
3
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Area Features
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Cargo Area Storage
Storage
When the third row seats are not in the stowed position,
there is a large area for cargo storage.
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
Rear Cargo Area
NOTE: With all rear seats stowed or removed, four by
eight foot sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle
floor with the liftgate closed. The front seats must be
moved slightly forward of the rearmost position.
Release Handle
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 135
Front Door Storage
Instrument Panel Drawer
Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for
storage.
There is a storage drawer located in the lower center of the
instrument panel. It can be released by pushing the access
button above it. The drawer is actuator assisted once the
access button is pushed. Pull drawer outward to the fully
open position.
Front Door Storage
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning
the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to
avoid injury.
Drawer Access Button
3
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Drawer Released
Drawer Fully Open
CAUTION!
The storage drawer must be closed while driving. If
left open during a collision, additional damage may
occur to property or the drawer mechanism.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 137
Front Seatback Storage — If Equipped
Umbrella Holder
The front seatbacks have a storage pocket on some models.
An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into the
front door entry scuff moldings.
3
Front Seatback Storage
Umbrella Holder
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Coat Hooks — If Equipped
Power Outlets
Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second
and third row seating positions. The coat hook load limit is
10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding the recommended load limit can
cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the
vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp) power
outlets, and 5 Volt (2.5 Amp) USB power outlets, that can
be used to power cellular phones, small electronics and
other low powered electrical accessories. The power outlets
can be labeled with either a “key” or a “battery” symbol to
indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled
with a “key” are powered when the ignition is in the ON or
ACC position, while the outlets labeled with a “battery”
are connected directly to the battery and powered at all
times.
NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
Coat Hook
• To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a Mopar knob
and element must be used.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 139
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
3
The front power outlet is located at the bottom of the
instrument panel.
Front USB Charge Only Port
12 Volt Front Power Outlet
140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
In addition to the front power outlets, there is also a power
outlet located in the rear cargo area.
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo area.
Power 2Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F95A-F95B USB IP 10A
2 — F85 Cigar Lighter 20A
3 — F60 RR Cargo Power Outlet 20A
Rear Power Outlet
NOTE: The USB outlet in the bottom of the instrument
panel can be switched from “ignition” only to constant
“battery” powered all the time. See your local authorized
dealer for details.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 141
WARNING! (Continued)
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
vehicle from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery or plug the vehicle in
with EVSE charger.
Power Inverter — If Equipped
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt Power Inverter outlet located
on the right side of the vehicle, before the third row of seats
to convert DC current to AC current. The Power Inverter
can power cellular phones, electronics and other low
power devices requiring up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end
video game consoles will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
Power Inverter
The Power Inverter will automatically turn on and off
when the device is plugged in or removed.
3
142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The Power Inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the
Power Inverter will automatically shut down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the Power Inverter
it will automatically reset. To avoid overloading the circuit,
check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using
the Power Inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Cigar Lighter — If Equipped
NOTE: Cigar lighters can be purchased at an authorized
dealer through Mopar parts. To ensure proper cigar lighter
operation, a Mopar knob and element must be used.
The cigar lighter is located at the bottom of the instrument
panel. Push lighter inward to heat.
After a few seconds, the lighter automatically returns to its
initial position and is ready to be used.
WARNING!
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot. To
avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with care.
Always check that the cigar lighter has turned off.
CAUTION!
Do not connect devices with power higher than 180
Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do not damage the
socket by using unsuitable adaptors. If the 180 Watt (15
Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped
With the optional authorized dealer-installed Smoker’s
Package Kit, a removable ash receiver is inserted into one
of the two cupholders in the center floor console. To install
the ash receiver, align the receiver so the thumb grip on the
lid is facing rearward. Push the ash receiver into either of
the cup wells to secure. Pull upward on the ash receiver to
remove for cleaning and/or storage.
The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accommodate a second ash receiver, if desired.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 143
Overhead Storage With Sunglass Storage
At the front of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of one pair of sunglasses.
From the closed position, push the door latch to open the
compartment.
3
Full Open Position
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
Over Head Sunglass Door Latch
The door will slowly rotate to the full open position.
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must
not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed within
the roof rack side rails. Crossbars should always be used
whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached.
144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Deploying The Crossbars
1. To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends of the crossbar and lift the crossbar
from its stowed position in the side rail. Repeat with
crossbar on the opposite side.
Roof Rack
1 — Side Rail
2 — Crossbar
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside
the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed
the maximum vehicle load capacity.
Thumb Screw
NOTE: The thumb screws cannot be fully removed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 145
2. Bend the crossbar supports at each end, taking care to
keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Slide the thumb screw
down.
3
Removing Crossbars
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
Bending Pivot
146 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Position the crossbars across the roof making sure the
letters on the crossbars align with the matching letters
on the side rail.
Installing Crossbars
5. Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to complete the
deployment of the crossbars.
Positioning Crossbars
4. Once the crossbar is in place, tighten both thumb screws
completely.
NOTE: The crossbars are not identical and have fixed
deployment positions. Rear crossbar can be deployed in
two different positions.
Stowing The Crossbars
1. Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends. Lift the crossbar away from the
matching letter to remove it from the deployed position.
Repeat with the other crossbar.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 147
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the crossbars to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
3. Then, position the crossbar along the correct side rail.
Make sure the letters on the crossbar align with the
matching letters on the side rail.
3
2. Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the pivot
supports at each end.
Stowing Crossbars
Crossbar Pivot
148 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. The crossbar will nest fully within the side rail.
5. Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place, tighten the
thumb screws completely.
Crossbar To Side Rail
Tightening Crossbar
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 149
6. Repeat the procedure to stow the second crossbar on the
opposite side.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal
injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
Stowed Crossbars
NOTE:
• To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the side
rails when they are not in use.
• If any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio
antenna (if equipped), you may experience interruption
of satellite radio reception.
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed. The load should be secured and
placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the
roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or other protective layer between the
load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lb
(68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
(Continued)
3
150 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Load should always be secured to cross bars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting
mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the straps and
thumb wheels frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
• Long loads that extend over the windshield, such as
wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
䡵 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . .152
▫ Red Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ Yellow Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ Yellow Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ Fuel And Oil Refresh Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
▫ KeySense Cluster Messages — If Equipped. . . . .157
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items . . . . . . .158
▫ Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Green Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ White Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Blue Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .176
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
4
152 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. % Power Gauge
• Indicates vehicle power. The upper half of the gauge is
a summation of the engine and high voltage battery
power applied to move the vehicle. Bottom half indicates when the high voltage battery is charging while
driving.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
2. Instrument Cluster Display
• The instrument cluster display features a driverinteractive display. When the appropriate conditions
exist, this display shows messages. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” located in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3. Fuel Gauge
• The gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
•
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
4. Reconfigurable Screen With Four Customer Programmable Options
• Battery % & Electric Range: shows values for electric
range and battery %, along with a teal gauge showing
battery % (state of charge 0-100%).
• Electric Range: shows electric range, along with a teal
gauge showing battery % (state of charge 0-100%).
• All Range: shows for electric, hybrid and total range,
along with a white gauge showing the range.
• NONE
5. Reconfigurable Screen With 4 Options
• Efficiency Coach: This gauge provides visual awareness on how to achieve maximum energy efficiency.
When accelerating or decelerating the most efficient
operation will be represented with the gauge color
being teal green. Less efficient operation will be demonstrated in the colors of yellow and orange based in
inefficiency.
• Charge/Power: This gauge represents the source of
the power utilized to accelerate the vehicle. The blue
inner ring represents the engine power. The green ring
represents the HV (High Voltage) battery output and
input power. Charging is represented by a downward
fill and occurs during regeneration.
• Energy economy: show the value for average MPG.
The green outer ring represents current MPG. The
white inner ring represents average MPG.
• NONE
4
154 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
• Hybrid Info
Your vehicle is equipped with an Instrument Cluster
Display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the STOP/OFF position (and the key
removed, for vehicles with mechanical key), opening/
closing of a door will activate the display for viewing, and
display the total miles or kilometers in the odometer. Your
Instrument Cluster Display is designed to display important information about your vehicle’s systems and features.
Using a driver interactive display located on the instrument panel, your Instrument Cluster Display can show you
how systems are working and give you warnings when
they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls allow
you to scroll through and enter the main menus and
sub-menus. You can access the specific information you
want and make selections and adjustments.
• Trip (Trip A/Trip B)
• Audio
• Messages
• Screen Setup
• Speed Warning — If Equipped
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
The Instrument Cluster Display is located in the center of
the instrument cluster.
The Main Menu items consists of the following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Driver Assist
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
• Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
upward through the Main Menu items.
• Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the Main Menu items.
• Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
• Back/Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
• OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item. Push
and hold the OK arrow button for one second to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
Oil Life Reset
• Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
display for approximately five seconds after a single
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
• Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position. To
reset the oil change indicator system (after performing
the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure.
• To reset the oil change indicator after performing the
scheduled maintenance, refer to the following procedure.
4
156 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
4. Hold the OK button to reset the “Oil Life” to 100%.
5. Push the up arrow button to exit the instrument cluster
display menu screen.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Fuel And Oil Refresh Mode
Keyless Push Button Ignition
Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition in the ON/
RUN position (do not start the vehicle.)
1. Push the OK button to enter the instrument cluster
display menu screen.
2. Push and release the down arrow button to access the
”Oil Life” menu screen.
3. Push the left arrow button or right arrow button to
access the “Vehicle Info” submenu.
Since it is possible to operate this vehicle for extended
periods of time without running the gas engine, the fuel
within the vehicle’s fuel tank can become stale. To prevent
engine and/or fuel system damage due to stale fuel, as
well as, maintaining internal engine lubrication, this vehicle is equipped with a “Fuel and Oil Refresh Mode”. The
vehicle will automatically enter into the Fuel and Oil
Refresh Mode to minimize potential for stale fuel, and to
ensure lubrication of internal engine components. When
operating in this mode, the gas engine will run to provide
vehicle propulsion (electric only operation is inhibited). A
message will be displayed in the instrument cluster whenever Fuel and Oil Refresh Mode is active. The vehicle will
automatically exit the Fuel and Oil Refresh Mode when
conditions have been satisfied. If the vehicle enters Fuel
and Oil Refresh Mode, due to fuel which has been in the
fuel tank for a long period of time (becoming stale fuel), the
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
engine will run whenever the vehicle is operational (no
electric only operation) until the low fuel level warning is
activated. It is possible to exit the Fuel and Oil Refresh
Mode sooner by adding new fuel to the vehicle’s fuel tank.
NOTE: Fuel Freshness is recalculated whenever fuel is
added to the vehicle’s fuel tank.
KeySense Cluster Messages — If Equipped
When the KeySense key is in use there will be:
• Continuous, dedicated telltale
• Unique Display Splash Screen
With KeySense in use there will be multiple
associated messages shown in the following table:
Setting
None – With vehicle ignition
ON
Max Vehicle Speed
Start Up Fuel Alert message
Early Low Fuel Alert Message
ParkSense
Blind Spot
Forward Collision Warning
Instrument Cluster Display Message
“KeySense in use. Max vehicle speed set to xx MPH/or km/h”
• “Max speed reached. KeySense in use” supported by a chime
• “Approaching max speed xx MPH/km” supported by a chime
“Range to empty xxx miles or km”
“Fuel Low”
“Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”
“Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”
“Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”
4
158 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
NOTE: The Instrument Cluster Display menu items display in the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items
may vary depending on your vehicle features.
Speedometer
• If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
Pressure System” is displayed.
• Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset.
• Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
under “Safety” for further information.
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
Speedometer is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK button to toggle between
MPH and km/h.
• Coolant Temperature
Vehicle Info
Displays the actual oil temperature.
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
Vehicle Info is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push the left or right arrow button to scroll through
the following information submenus:
• Oil Pressure
• Tire Pressure
• If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
ICON.
• If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON, and the tire
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
color than the other tire pressure value.
Displays the actual battery voltage.
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Battery Voltage
• Engine Hours — If Equipped
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
Oil Life (Hold OK Button To Reset)
Hybrid Info
The “Hold OK to Reset” instruction will be displayed at all
times, but the following conditions will need to be met in
order to reset Oil Life:
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
Hybrid Info is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push the left or right arrow button to scroll through
the following information submenus:
• The vehicle must be off
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position
If the conditions are met, holding the OK button will reset
the gauge and the numeric display will return to 100%.
If the conditions are not met, a popup message will display
for 5 seconds, describing the required conditions, and then
the Oil Life screen will reappear.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button until Driver
Assist is highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
• Adaptive Cruise Control and LaneSense:
• Driver Assist Screen shows the current status of both
the ACC and the LaneSense systems
• Popup messages also indicate the status of the system
and/or the conditions that need to be met
• Energy Economy
• Average Energy Economy gauge + value (hold OK to
reset)
• Current Energy Economy gauge + value
• Total Range
• Range to Empty
• Electric Range
• Hybrid Range
• Total Range
• Efficiency Coach
• Refer to “Instrument Cluster Descriptions” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for gauge description.
• Charge/Power
• Refer to “Instrument Cluster Descriptions” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for gauge description.
4
160 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip Info
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Push and release the up or down arrow button until Trip
Info is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push
the left or right arrow button to scroll through the Trip A
and Trip B submenus. The Trip information will display the
following:
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button until Audio
is highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
• Current Media Source
Trip A
• Song title
• Distance Electric
• Artist (if available)
• Distance Hybrid
• Phone status
• Distance Total
Messages
• Average Energy Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
Messages is highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
This feature shows the number of stored warning messages. Pushing the right arrow button will allow you to see
what the stored messages are.
• Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Trip B
• Distance Electric
• Distance Hybrid
• Distance Total
• Average Energy Economy
• Elapsed Time
NOTE: The popup messages indicate the status of the
system and/or the conditions that need to be met. Messages remain in the stored stack until condition is cleared.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
Screen Setup
2 — Upper Left
Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options:
• None
1 — Left Side
• Energy Economy
• Efficiency Coach (Default)
• Charge/ Power
• None
• Compass (Default)
• Outside Temp (Option 2 default)
• Time (Option 3 default)
• Average MPG (or “L/100km”, or “km/L”)
• Current MPG (or “L/100km”, or “km/L”)
• Trip A (Total Distance
• Trip B (Total Distance)
• Battery %
• Total Range
• Electric Range
• Hybrid Range
4
162 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4 — Right Side
5 — Odometer
6 — Defaults
Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options:
• None
3 — Upper Right
• Compass
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Average MPG (or “L/100km”, or “km/L”)
• Current MPG (or “L/100km”, or “km/L”)
• Trip A (Total Distance
• Trip B (Total Distance)
• Battery % (default)
• Total Range
• Electric Range
• Hybrid Range
• None
• Battery % & EV Range
• Electric Range
• All (3) Range Values (Default)
• Show (Default)
• Hide (unless door open)
• Restore
• Cancel
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
Speed Warning — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button until Speed
Warning is highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the OK button to enter speed warning.
Use the up or down arrow button to turn the speed
warning ON or OFF, then push and release the OK button
to confirm the selection. If the ON status is selected, use the
up or down arrow button to set the desired speed, then
push the OK button to set the speed for the speed warning.
A speed warning telltale will illuminate in the instrument
cluster, with a number matching the set speed, with a pop
up message to inform the driver that the speed warning
has been set to the desired speed. Each time the set speed
is exceeded more than 2 mph (3 km/h), an audible chime
will sound for up to 10 seconds, or until the speed is no
longer exceeded. The telltale in the instrument cluster will
also change from white to yellow, and a pop up warning
message will pop up on the instrument cluster display.
NOTE: Speed Warning is unavailable while KeySense is in
use.
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped
The vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction will be functional when the hybrid propulsion system is active. The vehicle may not be running
depending on the battery SOC and temperature. It will
display a message if there is a risk of battery depletion to
the point where the vehicle may stall due to lack of
electrical supply, or will not restart after the current drive
cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state
of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate
that the charging system cannot sustain.
4
164 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• The charging system is independent from load reduction. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery
Charge Warning Light” in ”Warning And Indicator
Lights And Messages” located in ”Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be effected by load reduction:
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
• Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
• HVAC System
• 115V AC Power Inverter System
• Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads
are larger than the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports)
during certain driving conditions (city driving, frequent
stopping).
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar devices.
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
• The battery was used for an extended period with the
vehicle not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaner’s, game
consoles and similar devices.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode”)
During a trip:
• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
– Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12V,
115V AC, USB ports
– Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
– Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and
Ignition Off Draw currents).
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time
and parking time).
• The vehicle should have service performed if the message is still present during consecutive trips and the
evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not
help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
Red Warning Lights
— Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb
check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on
during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime
when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have
an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on.
When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash
or remain on continuously and a chime will sound. Refer to
“Occupant Restraints Systems” in “Safety” for further
information.
4
166 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including
brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the
brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake
is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is
a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by your authorized dealer.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging
properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there
may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
— Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too high, this indicator will
illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will be
sound for four minutes or until the engine is allowed to
cool whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to “If
Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
— Electric Power Steering Fail Warning Light
This light will turn on when there’s a fault with the EPS
(Electric Power Steering)
Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic
Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected
while the vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or
flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the
ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped
and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The
light should turn off. If the light remains on with the
vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as
possible.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
4
168 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
— Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off
the engine as soon as possible.
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light
turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this
light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This
light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The
engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
— Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light indicates that there is excessive transmission
fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such
as trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until the light turns off. Once
the light turns off, you may continue to drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
— Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15
seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
— Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and
not fully closed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
— Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will turn when the liftgate is open.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
— Hybrid Electric Vehicle System Service Light
This indicator will illuminate when service to the hybrid
electric system is needed. It will be accompanied by a
⬙Service Hybrid Electric Vehicle System⬙ message in the
cluster. If the telltale stays on or continues to come on,
contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
— Plug Status Fault Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a plug status fault is
detected (when vehicle not in motion). It will be accompanied by a cluster message indicating the type of fault. You
may receive one of the following messages if a fault is
detected:
• “Service Charging System” – If you see this message,
contact your authorized dealer to service your high
voltage charging system.
• “Issue Detected Check External Charging Station” – If
you see this message, something may be wrong with the
charger/charging station and not your vehicle. It is
recommended to try a different charging station to
verify. If an issue continues, then contact you authorized
dealer.
NOTE: Before driving the vehicle make sure the charging
cord has been removed from the charging inlet.
— Torque Limited Warning Light
This telltale illuminates when vehicle acceleration is limited due to a reduction in engine or electric motor performance. Contact your authorized dealer for service.
Yellow Warning Lights
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The
light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
4
170 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional
brake system will continue to operate normally if the brake
warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position,
have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Warning
Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It
should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles,
and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers)
at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator
Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off Warning
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is
off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
— Electronic Park Brake Fail Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Electronic Park
Brake is not functioning properly and service is required.
Contact your authorized dealership.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
— LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid yellow when
the vehicle is crossing a lane marker.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
— LaneSense Failure Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when the LaneSense system is not
operating and needs service. Please see your authorized
dealer.
— Low Fuel Warning Light
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning
Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate a fault in the ACC
system. Contact your local authorized dealer for service.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Starting And Operating.”
— Forward Collision Warning Light — If
Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate a fault in the Forward
Collision Warning System. Contact your local authorized
dealer for service. Refer to ⬙Forward Collision Warning
(FCW)⬙ in ⬙Safety⬙ for further information.
When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.26 gal (4.75 L)
this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added.
— Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel Warning.
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a
part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN,
have the condition checked promptly.
— Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer
fluid is low.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor
quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start.
4
172 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through
several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed
to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring.
In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption
may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
above, the display will show the indications corresponding
to each tire in sequence.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
(Continued)
4
174 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued)
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
Yellow Indicator Lights
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light indicates that Forward Collision Warning is off.
Green Indicator Lights
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The turn signal arrows will flash independently when left
or right turn signals are selected. Turn signals can be
activated when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
— KeySense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The KeySense indicator is solid green when a KeySense key
is detected upon startup of the vehicle. The indicator will
remain lit for the entire key cycle as a reminder that the
KeySense key is in use. While the KeySense key is in use,
the vehicle will respond to settings associated with the
KeySense profile. Refer to “Keys⬙ in “Getting to Know Your
Vehicle” for further information.
— LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator is solid green when both lane
markings have been detected and the system is “armed” to
provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster and a
torque warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional
lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Target Detected Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control
speed is SET and there is no target vehicle detected. Refer
to ⬙Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped⬙ in
⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Detected Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control
speed is SET and the target vehicle is detected. Refer to
⬙Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for further information.
— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or
headlights are turned on.
— Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are
on.
— Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the speed control is set to the
desired speed. Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
— Plug Status Indicator Light
When plugged in, the green plug will appear if the EVSE
charging plug is securely attached to the charging part.
This indicates that the plug is detected, but doesn’t mean it
is charging:
• “Plugged In And Charging”
• “Plugged In And Waiting to Charge On A Set Schedule”
• “Plugged in and Charging Complete”
NOTE: The vehicle cannot be driven until it is unplugged.
White Indicator Lights
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when the vehicle equipped with
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has been turned on and in
the READY state. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
— If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
— LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but not armed, the
LaneSense indicator is solid white. This occurs when only
left, right, or neither line has been detected. If a single lane
4
176 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
line is detected, and the system is ready to provide only
visual warnings if an unintentional lane departure occurs
on detected lane line. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
— Speed Control ON Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is
ON, but a speed has not been set.
— Set Speed Warning Light — If Equipped
When Set Speed Warning is turned on, the speed warning
telltale will illuminate in the instrument cluster with a
number matching the set speed. When the set speed is
exceeded, a single chime will sound along with pop up
message of speed warning exceeded. When the set speed is
exceeded by 1.8 mph (3 km/h) or more, the indication will
light up yellow and flash along with a continuous chime
(up to ten seconds or until the speed is no longer exceeded). Speed Warning can be turned on and off in the
instrument cluster display, for further information refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel.”
The number “55” is only an example of a speed that can be
set.
Blue Indicator Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on.
With the low beams activated, push the multifunction lever
forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the
high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward (toward
the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high beams. Pull the
lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to
pass⬙ scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see
your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD
II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
(Continued)
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Multimedia”.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
4
178 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position
or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II
system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
SAFETY
CONTENTS
䡵 SAFETY FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . . . .222
▫ Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . .181
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ Regenerative Braking System (RBS) — Hybrid . .188
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
䡵 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . .189
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
▫ Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped . . .189
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
▫ Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . .199
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .204
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features . . . . . . . .204
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
5
180 SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake System
Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning
Light” does not come on when the ignition is turned to the
ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
181
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert
Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS), and Dynamic
Steering Torque (DST).
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce vehicle power to provide enhanced acceleration
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential
and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one
wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more vehicle torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS
and ESC are in a reduced mode.
5
182 SAFETY
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may stay
on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come
on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
SAFETY
183
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and
Electric Power Steering (EPS) modules that provides
torque at the steering wheel for certain driving conditions
in which the ESC module is detecting vehicle instability.
The torque that the steering wheel receives is only meant to
help the driver realize optimal steering behavior in order to
reach/maintain vehicle stability. The only notification the
driver receives that the feature is active is the torque
applied to the steering wheel.
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through small torques
on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of the
DST feature is highly dependent on the driver’s sensitivity
and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very
important to realize that this feature will not steer the
vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for steering
the vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of
the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent
the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve
leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
5
184 SAFETY
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
(Continued)
SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
185
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which
allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
NOTE: When driving with snow chains, or when starting
off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to
allow more wheel spin. This can be accomplished by
momentarily pushing the “ESC Off” button to enter partial
mode “Partial Off” mode. Once the situation requiring
“Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by
momentarily pushing the “ESC Off” button. This may be
done while the vehicle is in motion.
5
186 SAFETY
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described
in the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC
OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is turned to the ON mode. It
should go out with the vehicle running. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on
continuously with the vehicle running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily
each time the ignition is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be on even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
SAFETY
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the
brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
187
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL.
The HSA system works alongside Autonomous Hill Hold
(AHH) to maintain vehicle position on an incline. In a
situation where the accelerator pedal is being used to keep
the vehicle stationary on an incline, the AHH system will
compensate and hold the vehicle in place until the accelerator pedal is pressed enough to push the vehicle forward.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision or serious personal injury.
5
188 SAFETY
Disabling And Enabling HSA
Regenerative Braking System (RBS) — Hybrid
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
Your vehicle has a Regenerative Braking System (RBS). The
RBS reduces the high voltage battery consumption of the
vehicle, particularly in stop-and-go city traffic. The electric
motors which propel the vehicle forward can operate as
generators when braking. The RBS recharges the high
voltage battery under certain braking conditions by recapturing energy that would otherwise be lost while braking.
The electric power that is generated goes back into the high
voltage battery for later use, for example when acceleration
is desired.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in
wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of
brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front
brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are
in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake Support is active,
there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach
full braking during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver.
The EBC will prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
The RBS uses conventional hydraulic friction brakes, regenerative braking, or a combination to slow the vehicle. If
the system detects slippery conditions while braking,
ONLY friction is used to slow the vehicle. The RBS can
result in extended life of the hydraulic service brakes;
however, all inspection, scheduled maintenance, and service intervals for the vehicle service brakes must be followed.
SAFETY
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
189
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode when
the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
• The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may experience
drop outs (blinking on and off) of the side mirror Warning
Indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any small object
remains at the side of the vehicle for extended periods of
time (more than a couple of seconds).
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
5
190 SAFETY
contamination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.).
• Cycle the ignition from on to off and then back on.
If the blockage message is still present after cycling the
ignition and driving in traffic, check again for a blockage.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. Refer
to “Modes Of Operation” in this section for further information.
Sensor Location
If the system detects degraded performance due to contamination or foreign objects, a message will warn you of a
blocked sensor and the warning indicators in side view
mirrors will be on. The warning indicators will remain
illuminated until blockage clearing conditions are met.
First clear the fascia area around the sensors of the blockage. After removing the blockage, the following procedure
can be used to reset the system:
Warning Light Location
SAFETY
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
191
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed
of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
5
Rear Monitoring
Side Monitoring
192 SAFETY
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less
than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the
blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the
two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Passing
Overtaking/Approaching
SAFETY
193
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, snow banks, car washes etc. However, occasionally
the system may alert on such objects. This is normal
operation and your vehicle does not require service.
5
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
Stationary Objects
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent
lanes.
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists,
or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the
BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal
before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
194 SAFETY
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors
are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will
not be able to alert the driver. Additionally, if the host
vehicle is obscured by a flat object on one side the system
can false alert on vehicles approaching from the opposite
direction.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver
is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the
vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
SAFETY
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only — Default Setting
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same time, both
the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to
the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
195
NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
• The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
• The BSM system can work in conjunction with the
Keysense function of the vehicle if equipped. Refer to
“KeySense Cluster Messages⬙ in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
5
196 SAFETY
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
— If Equipped
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings, visual
warnings (within the instrument cluster display), and may
apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended to provide the driver with enough time to
react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited
level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate
the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the
warnings by braking and the system determines that the
driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not
applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate
and provide additional brake force as required.
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed below
26 mph (42 km/h), the system may provide the maximum
braking possible to mitigate the potential forward collision.
If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold the
vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release the
brakes.
SAFETY
197
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW
will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
WARNING!
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated.
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
5
198 SAFETY
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
NOTE:
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
• Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” prevents
the system from providing limited active braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision,
but maintains the audible and visual warnings.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium” setting
and the system status is “Warning & Braking”. This allows
the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to “Far” setting allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front using audible/visual warning when the
latter is at a farther distance than ⬙Medium⬙ setting. This
provides the most reaction time to avoid a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front when the distance between the vehicle in
the front is much closer. This setting provides less reaction
time than the “Far” and “Medium” settings, which allows
for a more dynamic driving experience.
• Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from providing autonomous braking, or additional
brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in
the event of a potential frontal collision.
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path
of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
• FCW can work in conjunction with the KeySense function of the vehicle if equipped. Refer to “KeySense
Cluster Messages⬙ in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
SAFETY
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition
that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may
not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the
system performance is no longer present, the system will
return to its full performance state. If the problem persists,
see your authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays:
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
199
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing and Maintenance” for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you
5
200 SAFETY
must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold
placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” to turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the system
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33
psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low
enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to
rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still be on. In this
situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed
for use on aftermarket wheels and may contribute to
a poor overall system performance or sensor damage.
Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels to
assure proper TPM feature operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to your authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
SAFETY
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light”.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
201
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four tire pressure monitoring sensors
• Various tire pressure monitoring system messages,
which display in the instrument cluster
• Tire pressure monitoring telltale light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster
display will display an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message and a
graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the
low tire pressure values in a different color.
5
202 SAFETY
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
Service TPMS Warning
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different color
in the instrument cluster display graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in the
⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update if the ignition is in the ON/RUN position, the
pressure values in the graphic display in the instrument
cluster display and will return to their original color, and
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off.
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound
a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a
⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer
exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will no
longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in
place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of
the following:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
SAFETY
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare — If Equipped
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition cycle, the “TPM Telltale
Light” will remain on and a chime will sound. In
addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will still
display a different color pressure value and an ⬙Inflate to
XX⬙ message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
203
addition, the instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will sound,
the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument
cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn off and the graphic in the
instrument cluster will display a new pressure value
instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as when
installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
5
204 SAFETY
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
will chime, the ⬙TPM Telltale Light⬙ will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument cluster will
display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then
display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
General Information
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the ⬙TPM Telltale
Light⬙ will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn off.
The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message and then display pressure values in
place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer be displayed
as long as no system fault exists.
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
SAFETY
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
205
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride
properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) should be secured in a vehicle
with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning
booster seats. Older children who do not use child
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Customer Assistance” section for customer service contact
information.
5
206 SAFETY
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
SAFETY
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
207
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
5
208 SAFETY
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
(Continued)
SAFETY
209
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer immediately and have it
fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
5
210 SAFETY
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
SAFETY
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
211
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
5
212 SAFETY
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front and second row outboard seats the shoulder
belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the
anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up
or down to the position that serves you best.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button.
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
WARNING!
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Second Row Center (If Equipped) And Third Row
Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions
The second row center (if equipped) and third row center
seat belts feature a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and
SAFETY
buckle, which allows the seat belt to detach from the lower
anchor when the seat is folded. The mini-latch plate and
regular latch plate can then be stored out of the way in the
headliner for added convenience to open up utilization of
the storage areas behind the front seats when the seat is not
occupied.
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over the
seat.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate
from its stowed position in the headliner slightly behind
the second or third row seat.
5
Mini-Latch Plate
Mini-Latch Stowage
213
214 SAFETY
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the left head
restraint.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Mini-Latch And Buckle Connected
Connect Mini-Latch To Buckle
SAFETY
215
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
5
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
2 — Seat Belt Buckle
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in
a collision.
216 SAFETY
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-buckle
for storage, insert the regular latch plate into the center
red slot on the mini-buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide
the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt
to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate and regular
latch plate into its stowed position.
WARNING!
• If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not properly connected when the seat belt is used by an
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in
a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When reattaching the mini-latch plate and minibuckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.
If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding
procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and minibuckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the minilatch plate and mini-buckle.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant,
it must be removed.
SAFETY
WARNING!
217
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
5
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
218 SAFETY
Seat Belt Pretensioner
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt
in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with an Energy
Management feature that may help further reduce the risk
of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has
a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in
a controlled manner.
7 Passenger Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
SAFETY
219
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
7 Passenger Quad Seat Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in a vehicle with a rear seat.
5
220 SAFETY
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped
The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped with a park
stitch to raise the latch plate for easier access to occupants.
If the park stitch interferes with the tight installation of a
child restraint, slide the latch plate over the stitching to
shorten the lap portion of the belt and install the car seat
normally. When the car seat is removed from the vehicle,
slide the latch plate above the park stitch to enable occupants to latch the seatbelt securely.
SAFETY
221
5
Seat Belt Park Stitch Location
Third Row Stow Clip - If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a stow clip on the
lower trim behind the third row. This clip is used to hold
the seat belt out of the path of the power folding third row
seat. Only place the seat belt webbing in this clip while
folding and opening the seat. Do not leave the webbing
behind the clip when using the belt to restrain an occupant.
Third Row Stow Clip
WARNING!
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the third
row stow clip when using the seat belt to restrain an
occupant. The seat belt will not be positioned properly
on the occupant and they could be more seriously
injured in an accident as a result.
222 SAFETY
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
• Occupant Classification System
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch
is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the
ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the
ACC position, the air bag system is not on and
the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
SAFETY
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags
may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
223
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which
could affect the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the
fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to
alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has
come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains
on while driving have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately. For additional information regarding
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” section of this manual.
5
224 SAFETY
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both
the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a
supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver front
air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument panel,
above the glove compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Passenger Knee
Air Bag
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
SAFETY
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is designed to
provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as determined
by the OCS.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
(Continued)
225
WARNING! (Continued)
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
5
226 SAFETY
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front
Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s seated
weight, as determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
following:
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
• Air Bag Warning Light
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side
of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The
front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor located in the front passenger seat
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is located
beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any weight on
the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input
from the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s most
probable classification. The OCM communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may reduce the inflation rate
of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
based on occupant classification. In order for the OCS to
SAFETY
operate as designed, it is important for the front passenger
to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the inflation
rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS
estimates that:
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very light
objects on it; or
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small passenger, including a child; or
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint; or
• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
Front Passenger Seat
Occupant Status
Rear-facing child restraint
Child, including a child in
a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat*
Front Passenger Air Bag
Output
Reduced-power deployment
Reduced-power deployment OR Full-power deployment
Front Passenger Seat
Occupant Status
Properly seated adult
Unoccupied seat
227
Front Passenger Air Bag
Output
Full-power
deployment
OR reduced-power deployment
Reduced-power deployment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat and never install a child restraint system,
including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
(Continued)
5
228 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on the
front passenger seat and where that weight is located. The
OCS communicates the classification status to the ORC.
The ORC uses the classification to determine whether the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be
adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly
wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:
• Sitting upright
• Facing forward
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfortably on or near the floor
• Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce the
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s seated
weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so may
result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines the
most probable classification of the occupant that it detects.
SAFETY
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a
collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight
on the front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat may result in a full-power deployment of
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
• Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger
seat.
• Anything that may decrease or increase the front passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument
panel).
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns to
face the rear of the vehicle.
• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
position.
• The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat and
center console.
229
Not Seated Properly
5
230 SAFETY
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
SAFETY
231
WARNING! (Continued)
Not Seated Properly
WARNING!
• If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or
adult in the front passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly seated weight input. This may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the
seatback in an upright position, your back against
(Continued)
the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the
center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or
near the floor.
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different than the occupant’s properly seated weight input, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
• Placing an object on the floor under the front passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or death
in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor
under the front passenger seat.
in the instrument panel
The Air Bag Warning Light
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS
may affect the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as you
drive, take the vehicle to your authorized dealer for
service immediately.
5
232 SAFETY
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS components that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify the
seated weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS components must function as designed. Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components, assembly,
or to the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs
service for any reason, take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat accessories may
be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the specific
model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover
and cushion specified for the vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
• At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
be modified or replaced with any part except those
which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
• Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related components,
seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the
air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
• If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact your authorized
dealer.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
SAFETY
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee Air
Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are
marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn
into the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air
Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove
compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and front air
bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
233
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
5
234 SAFETY
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
SAFETY
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
WARNING!
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
235
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a
particular impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the
ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact
events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that
require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts,
the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
5
236 SAFETY
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
(Continued)
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The
rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In
SAFETY
the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover
event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate,
the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
237
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
Air Bag System Components
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
5
238 SAFETY
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off battery power to the motor.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
SAFETY
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
After an event occurs requiring activation of the Enhanced
Accident Response System, when the system is active, a “
Service Hybrid Electric Vehicle System” message will be
displayed on the instrument cluster. The vehicle is not
drivable in this state.
In order to reset the High Voltage Battery and Engine, the
vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer immediately to be inspected and have the Enhanced Accident
Response System reset.
In order to immediately reset the Hazard Flashers, Interior
Lights, Power Door Locks, HVAC Blower Motor, the ignition switch must be changed from START or ON/RUN to
ignition OFF.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
(Continued)
239
WARNING! (Continued)
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact your
authorized dealer.
5
240 SAFETY
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
SAFETY
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
241
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/
parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website
for
additional
information:
http://
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm
5
242 SAFETY
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining
Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Children who are at least two years
old or who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their rearfacing child restraint
Children who have outgrown their
forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have outgrown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
a five-point Harness, facing forward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
SAFETY
Infant And Child Restraints
243
WARNING! (Continued)
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rearfacing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear support
leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is not
designed to manage the crash forces of this type of car
seat. In a crash, the support leg may not function as it
was designed by the car seat manufacturer, and your
child may be more severely injured as a result.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air
bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death
or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including
a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING!
5
244 SAFETY
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forwardfacing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
SAFETY
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
245
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
5
246 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Seat Belt + Top
Anchors Only
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Tether Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
247
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
5
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
7 Passenger LATCH Positions Second Row Bench
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
248 SAFETY
7 Passenger LATCH Positions Second Row Quad
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
What is the weight limit
(child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to
attach the child restraint?
Frequently Asked Questions
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint
is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchor instead of the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
SAFETY
Can the LATCH anchorages
and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Can the head restraints be removed?
249
Frequently Asked Questions
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing
or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual
for more information.
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does
not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Yes
The 2nd row head restraints are removable. The
3rd row center head restraint is removable, but
the 3rd row outboard head restraints are not removable.
5
250 SAFETY
NOTE: If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes with the installation of the child restraint, the head
restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in front
of it.
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright
position when the seat is to be used by an occupant
who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with the
head restraint in its lowered position could result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
SAFETY
251
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the
rear of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
5
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Bench Anchorages
Shown)
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown)
252 SAFETY
LATCH Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorages Shown)
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages located behind all
second row seating positions. The third row has
a tether anchor on the 40% seat for the right
outboard position and in the center of the 60%
seat for either the center or left outboard seating
position. All tether anchorages are located on the back of
the seat, near the floor.
Tether Strap Anchorage (Second Row Anchorage Shown)
SAFETY
253
5
Tether Strap Anchorages (Second Row Bench Anchorage
Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorage
Shown)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rearfacing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
254 SAFETY
Center Seat LATCH
This vehicle has 4 lower LATCH anchorages in the third
row, rear seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right
outboard position behind the front passenger (1). Anchorages C and D are used for the center seating position (2).
The left outboard position (3) does not have lower anchorages. Do not install a child restraint using anchorages B
and C. This is not a LATCH position in your vehicle.
not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center
position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt,
do not install a child seat in that outboard position.
WARNING!
• Use anchorages C and D to install a LATCHcompatible child restraint in the center seating position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible child
restraint using anchorages B and C. This is not a
LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to ⴖInstalling
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint Systemⴖ for
typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
Center Seat LATCH Positions
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the
seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
SAFETY
255
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt:
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
5
256 SAFETY
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional
information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
SAFETY
257
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
5
7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Seat Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
7 Passenger Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
258 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child reusing the seat belt to install a forstraint) for using the Tether Anchor
ward facing child restraint, up to the
with the seat belt to attach a forward
recommended weight limit of the
facing child restraint?
child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
Yes
Contact between the front passenger
touch the back of the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is alseat?
lowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
The 2nd row head restraints are removable. The 3rd row center head
restraint is removable, but the 3rd
row outboard head restraints are not
removable.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
tighten the seat belt against the belt
seating position with an ALR retracpath of the child restraint?
tor.
NOTE: If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes with the installation of the child restraint, the head
restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in front
of it.
SAFETY
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright
position when the seat is to be used by an occupant
who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with the
head restraint in its lowered position could result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
259
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
1 – Folded Headrest
2 – Child Restraint
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
5
260 SAFETY
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
SAFETY
Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped
The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped with a park
stitch to raise the latch plate for easier access to occupants.
If the park stitch interferes with the tight installation of a
child restraint, slide the latch plate over the stitching to
shorten the lap portion of the belt and install the car seat
following the steps above. When the car seat is removed
from the vehicle, slide the latch plate above the park stitch
to enable occupants to latch the seatbelt securely.
If the park stitch interferes with the lock-off features of the
child restraint, do not use the lock-off feature. Instead,
switch the seat belt to the locking mode, as described in the
steps above or move the car seat to a different seating
position.
5
Seat Belt Park Stitch
Seat Belt Park Stitch Location
261
262 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
Top Tether Anchorage Locations 2nd Row Bench Row
SAFETY
263
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
5
Top Tether Anchorage Locations 3rd Row
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and
pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the
head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment (Second Row
Anchorage Shown)
264 SAFETY
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
2. If the car seat is in the center, raise the center head
restraint and route the tether strap around the inboard
(left) side of the head restraint support posts, as shown
in the diagram.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Third Row Tether Attachment
The tether anchorage found on the back of the 60% seat in
the third row may be used by either the left outboard or the
center seating position. Only tether one child restraint to
the tether anchorage at a time.
To connect the tether strap hook to the tether anchorage for
either seating position on the 60% third row seat:
1. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
Center Tether Attachment – 3rd Row
SAFETY
265
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An
unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured,
or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
5
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
Outboard Tether Attachments – 3rd Row
WARNING!
Do not connect the tether strap for more than one child
restraint to the tether anchorage on the 60% seat in the
third row. This anchorage is intended for one child
restraint at a time.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
(Continued)
266 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
SAFETY
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air
Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until the
fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have your authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant
Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
267
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only
use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of
the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your
vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
your floor mat using the
• ALWAYS securely attach
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
before installing any other
FROM THE VEHICLE
floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
mat on top of an existing floor mat.
(Continued)
5
268 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and reinstalled, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
(Continued)
SAFETY
269
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Door Latches
Tires
Fluid Leaks
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are
suspected. The cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING THE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
䡵 ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION . . . . . . . . . . . .288
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
▫ Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
䡵 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ After Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
▫ To Turn Off The Vehicle Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ To Set A Desired Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .276
䡵 PARK BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Electric Park Brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .283
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . . .294
▫ Hybrid Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . . .294
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ To Activate/Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
6
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . . .318
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System. .318
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System. . . . . . . . . . . . .319
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .319
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . . .299
䡵 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
▫ ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . . .302
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . . .303
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC. . . . . . . . .305
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . . .309
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
▫ ParkSense Visual Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
▫ ParkSense Visual Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . . .332
▫ Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . . . .332
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System. . . . . . . . . . . . .333
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .333
䡵 PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
▫ Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active Park
Assist System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
▫ Parallel Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
▫ Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ Turning LaneSense On Or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
▫ LaneSense Warning Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
▫ Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
䡵 SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
䡵 REFUELING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle. . . .371
▫ Recreational Towing — All Models . . . . . . . . . .371
䡵 DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
▫ Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
6
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the PARK
position. Apply the brake before shifting to any driving
range.
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead
battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key fob
(side opposite of the Emergency Key) against the ENGINE
START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition
switch.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn On The Vehicle Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The vehicle will go into Drive Ready mode (silent start,
and “ready” is indicated on the cluster without the
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
engine running), which may include the start of the
engine depending on conditions such as battery state of
charge and vehicle temperature.
4. If you wish to stop the vehicle from achieving Drive
Ready mode, push the button again.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three positions: OFF, ACC and RUN.
To change the ignition modes without starting the vehicle
and use the accessories, follow these steps:
Cold Weather Operation
If the outside ambient temperature is 32°F or below, the
instrument cluster will request the vehicle to be plugged to
provide conditioning of the vehicle high voltage battery.
After Starting
The vehicle will optimize the energy efficiency and either
turn on the engine or operate in electric mode.
To Turn Off The Vehicle Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition in the ACC mode (instrument cluster will
display “ACC”).
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short
pushes in a row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
(8 km/h) before the vehicle will shut off. The ignition
switch position will remain in the ACC position until the
gear selector is in PARK and the button is pushed twice
to the OFF position. If the gear selector is not in PARK
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once,
the instrument cluster display will display a “Vehicle
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition in the RUN mode (instrument
cluster will display “ON/RUN”).
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF mode (instrument cluster
will display “OFF”).
6
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
Not In Park” message and the vehicle will remain
running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position,
or it could roll.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with an automatic shutdown feature. If the vehicle is left in a “READY” state
(vehicle running) with the shifter in “PARK” for one hour
after the driver exits, it will automatically turn off the
vehicle. Notifications have been included in this feature to
raise awareness of the timed event: the instrument cluster
will display “Ready to drive”, and will be accompanied by
three audible chimes while exiting the vehicle. The interior
warnings will occur regardless if the key fob remains in the
vehicle or is removed. Additionally, the horn will sound
three times if the fob is removed from the vehicle and the
ignition state is in the “READY” mode. Please consider this
feature when intentionally standing the vehicle for extended periods of time over one hour. To restart the vehicle,
follow the normal process for starting your vehicle.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem.
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Dealer
Service” in “Servicing And Maintenance”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
PARK BRAKE
Electric Park Brake (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park Brake
System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some
additional features that make the park brake more convenient and useful.
The park brake is primarily intended to prevent the vehicle
from rolling while parked. Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure that the park brake is applied. Also, be certain to leave
the transmission in PARK.
You can engage the park brake in two ways;
• Manually, by applying the park brake switch.
• Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake feature
in the customer programmable features section of the
Uconnect Settings.
The park brake switch is located in the integrated center
stack.
6
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the park brake manually, push the switch momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from the
back of the vehicle while the park brake engages. Once the
park brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in
the instrument cluster and an indicator on the switch will
illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal while you
apply the park brake, you may notice a small amount of
brake pedal movement. The park brake can be applied
even when the ignition switch is OFF, however, it can only
be released when the ignition switch in the ACC or
ON/RUN position.
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 180 seconds. The light will
extinguish upon releasing the switch.
Once the park brake is fully disengaged, the BRAKE
warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the LED
indicator on the switch will extinguish.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking brake
will automatically engage whenever the transmission is
placed into PARK. Once the park brake is engaged, the
BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the
LED indicator on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is
on the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount of
brake pedal movement while the parking brake is engaging.
Your vehicle has been equipped with an automatic hill
parking grade feature. If the vehicle is placed in park on
moderate to steep grade, the electric park brake has been
designed to automatically apply when necessary. When
this occurs, a message will display in the cluster, and the
“BRAKE” lamp and parking brake selector button will
illuminate to indicate activation. The electric parking brake
will automatically release when shifting out of park if your
seatbelt is buckled. Additionally, the driver will always
have the ability to manually release the electric parking
brake by pressing the selector button on the console.
The park brake will release automatically when the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position, the transmission is
in DRIVE or REVERSE, and the driver seat belt is buckled
and an attempt is made to drive the vehicle away by
pressing the accelerator pedal.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition switch
must be in the ON/RUN position. Press on the brake
pedal, then push the park brake switch momentarily. You
may hear a slight whirring sound from the back of the
vehicle while the parking brake disengages. You may also
notice a small amount of movement in the brake pedal.
NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and
away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the park
brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make
it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The park
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not
in the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
• Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged,
or repeated use of the parking brake to slow the
vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake
system.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to
engage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion, push
on the electric park brake switch for as long as engagement
is desired. The BRAKE warning lamp will illuminate, and
a continuous chime will sound. The rear stop lamps will
also be illuminated automatically while the vehicle remains in motion.
6
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
To disengage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion,
release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a complete
stop using the park brake, when the vehicle reaches
approximately 3 mph (4.8 km/h), the park brake will
remain engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric Park
Brake system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate. This
may be accompanied by the BRAKE warning lamp flashing. In this case, urgent service of the electric park brake
system is required. Do not rely on the park brake to hold
the vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The Electric Park Brake can be programmed to be applied
automatically whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and
the automatic transmission is placed in PARK. Auto Park
Brake is enabled and disabled by customer selection
through the “Customer Programmable Features” section of
the “Uconnect Settings”.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake
System that will engage the park brake automatically if the
vehicle is left unsecured. If the automatic transmission is
not in PARK, the seat belt is unbuckled, the driver door is
open, the vehicle is at a standstill, and there is no attempt
to depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal, the park
brake will automatically engage to prevent the vehicle
from rolling.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the
Electric Park Brake Switch while the driver door is open
and brake pedal is pressed. Once manually bypassed,
SafeHold will be enabled again once the vehicle reaches
12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to the OFF
position and back to ON again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by your authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. You should
only enter Brake Service Mode during brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for
you or your technician to push the rear piston into the rear
caliper bore. With the Electric Park Brake system, this can
only be done after retracting the Electric Park Brake
actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done easily
by entering the “Brake Service” through the “Uconnect
Settings” in your vehicle. This menu based system will
guide you through the steps necessary to retract the EPB
actuator in order to perform rear brake service.
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
Brake Service Mode has requirements that must be met in
order to be activated:
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
• The vehicle must be at a standstill.
WARNING!
• The park brake must be unapplied.
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
park brake. Always apply the park brake fully when
exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
• The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
While in service mode, the Electric Park Brake fault lamp
will flash continuously while the ignition switch is ON.
When brake service work is complete, the following steps
must be followed to reset the parking brake system to
normal operation:
• Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
• Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
• Apply the Electric Park Brake Switch.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
(Continued)
6
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally (or stopped) and your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running or the propulsion system is active. Before
exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the park brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition
is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the park brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
Ignition Park Interlock
Your vehicle is equipped with a Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. This helps the
driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks
the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the
OFF mode.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
Your vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN mode (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also be
pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
Hybrid Transmission
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the center console. The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
DRIVE, and LOW shift positions. Using the LOW position
will increase the rate of deceleration when the accelerator
pedal is released in comparison to the DRIVE position. The
transmission gear range (PRNDL) is displayed both above
the gear selector and in the instrument cluster display. To
select a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector. Push
down on the gear selector, and then rotate it, to access the
L position. You must also press the brake pedal to shift the
transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when the vehicle
is stopped). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such
as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the
appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
NOTE: In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear (for
example, driver selects PARK while driving), the position
indicator will blink continuously until the selector is returned to the proper position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
6
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
Transmission Gear Selector
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
• Turn the ignition OFF.
• Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
park brake. Always apply the park brake fully when
exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally (or stopped) and your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running or the propulsion system is active. Before
exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the park brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition
is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the park brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
(Continued)
6
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not
blinking.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NOTE: Based on the drive gear and/or speed of the
vehicle, the Quiet Vehicle Pedestrian Module (QVPM) will
broadcast a sound to warn nearby pedestrians that a
vehicle is approaching. In addition, the module will indicate change in speed by varying the pitch of sound.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the propulsion system active. The vehicle
may be started in this range. Apply the park brake and
shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
LOW (L)
This range should be used when descending very steep
grades. Using the LOW position will increase the rate of
deceleration when the accelerator pedal is released in
comparison to the DRIVE position. To access the LOW
position, push down on the gear selector and rotate it fully
clockwise.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the best fuel economy. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving characteristics under
all normal operating conditions.
If the transmission becomes too hot, the ⬙Transmission
Temperature Warning Light⬙ may illuminate, a warning
message may appear in the instrument cluster display and
the torque level may be reduced until the transmission
cools down.
NOTE: Based on the drive gear and/or speed of the
vehicle, the Quiet Vehicle Pedestrian Module (QVPM) will
broadcast a sound to warn nearby pedestrians that a
vehicle is approaching. In addition, the module will indicate change in speed by varying the pitch of sound.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, vehicle speed is limited to
about 20 mph. In addition to the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL), the Service Hybrid System Telltale, the Red
Turtle indication, and a popup message indicating that
vehicle speed may be limited may all be illuminated. Limp
Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
6
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift
the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the vehicle turns
OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the vehicle.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
which creates counteracting sound waves in the audio
system’s speakers. This helps keep the vehicle quiet at idle
and during drive.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light
efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the
electric steering system experiences a fault that reduces
assist or prevents the vehicle from providing assist, you
will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise Cancellation
System. This system is designed to address exhaust and
engine noise. The system relies on four microphones
embedded in the headliner, which monitor exhaust and
engine noise, and assists an onboard frequency generator,
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING⬙ OR
⬙POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE
SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon are
displayed on the instrument cluster screen, it
indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
assistance. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
6
• The power steering system is fully electric; it requires no
power steering fluid.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — On/Off
2 — SET+/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET-/Decel
5 — CANC/Cancel
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple
Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by
pushing the Speed Control on/off button and resetting the
desired vehicle set speed.
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control. The
cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster display will
illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off button
a second time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-)
button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect system if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
To Accelerate For Passing
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect system if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
To Resume Speed
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
6
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Deactivate
NOTE:
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC (cancel)
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle
will deactivate the speed control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC
will maintain a fixed set speed.
Pushing the on/off button or cycling the ignition to OFF,
erases the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
system and not designed to prevent collisions. Speed
Control function performs differently. Please refer to the
proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to
reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly
ahead of you.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode for cruising
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in
this section.
NOTE: Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not react
to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode
selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently. Always confirm which mode is selected.
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions
into account, and may be limited upon adverse
sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for
approximately 3 minutes in the stop position. If the
target vehicle does not start moving within 3
minutes the parking brake will be activated, and
the ACC system will be cancelled.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in
highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
(Continued)
6
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the instrument cluster display
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
— Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control On/Off
— SET+/Accel
— RES/Resume
— SET-/Decel
— Distance Setting Increase
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
— Distance Setting Decrease
— CANC/Cancel
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE
or NEUTRAL.
• When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
• When the driver door is open at low speed.
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speed.
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster
displays “ACC Ready.”
6
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
system will turn off and the instrument cluster display will
show “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The instrument
cluster display will show the set speed.
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph
(32 km/h). If the system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in
front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal, after the
ACC has been set. If you do not, the vehicle may continue
to accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:
• The message “ACC DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display
in the instrument cluster display.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed
will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory
if:
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
To Cancel
To Resume
The following conditions cancel the system:
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The instrument cluster display will display the last
set speed.
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANC (cancel) button is pushed.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
NOTE:
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the driver will either have to push the RES
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing set speed.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that
is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road
conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or
decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect Settings if equipped. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed
increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
6
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect Settings if equipped. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed
decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET
(-) buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
• When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the
powertrain braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
automatically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two seconds
the driver will either have to push the RES (resume)
button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the
ACC to the existing Set Speed.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill.
This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set
speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the instrument cluster display.
6
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Decrease button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set
speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same
lane, the instrument cluster displays the “Sensed Vehicle
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed
automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless
of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor.
6
• The distance setting is changed.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain
the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will
flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
Brake Alert
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action and does
not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,
the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the
ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes
the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to a
standstill while following a target vehicle, if the target
vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle
coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion
without the need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver
will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or apply
the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing
Set Speed.
NOTE: After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a
standstill for approximately 3 consecutive minutes, the
parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will
be cancelled.
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the
driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened,
the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system
will be cancelled.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects
in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster displays the current ACC system
settings. The instrument cluster display is located in the
center of the instrument cluster. The information it displays
depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following
displays in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
Display Warnings And Maintenance
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
Push the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on the
steering wheel) and the following will display in the
instrument cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
show “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
6
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer to
“Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important
to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor
lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the
sensor lens.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized
dealer.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will indicate
when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as
mud, dirt, or ice on windshield, driving directly into the
sun and fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the
instrument cluster display will show “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and the system will
have degraded performance.
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing
camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/
FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an
internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists,
see your authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly.
The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.
6
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
Offset Driving
Turns And Bends
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset
from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from
a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of
the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the
vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your
original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turn Or Bend Example
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
Using ACC On Hills
Lane Changing
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it
may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it
is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing Example
6
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the
lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have
moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the
vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising
at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without
requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise
Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes, push the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button which turns
the ACC and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off.
Pushing the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off
button will result in turning on (changing to) the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode, the
system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the
proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead
since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
on. When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle
will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been
set a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)”
will appear indicating what speed was set. This light will
turn on when the system is turned on via the on/off
control. It turns green when the cruise control is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
6
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect Settings if equipped. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed
increment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph)
or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect Settings if equipped. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed
decrement shown is dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph)
or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory
if:
To Cancel
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed.
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the memory:
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANC (cancel) button is pushed.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia
and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. If your vehicle is equipped with an
Automatic Transmission, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied and released when performing a reverse
parking maneuver if the system detects a possible collision
with an obstacle.
6
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The driver can override the automatic braking function
by pushing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off via
ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the automatic brakes are being applied.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
• The automatic braking function may not provide
enough vehicle deceleration to avoid colliding with a
detected obstacle depending on vehicle speed, road
conditions, and brake capability.
• The automatic braking function may not be applied fast
enough for moving obstacles that approach the rear of
the vehicle from the left and / or right sides.
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System.
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state for
the automatic braking function through ignition cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the vehicle.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle’s movements.
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s operating
speed, a warning will appear within the instrument cluster
display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The system
will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to
speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
ParkSense Sensors
ParkSense Visual Alert
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200
cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer - Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System. Refer
to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the
detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has been
detected, the warning display will turn on indicating the
system status.
Rear Sensor Locations
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region
and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
6
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone
will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
6
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 inches 47-39 inches
(150-120
(120-100
cm)
cm)
Greater
than
79 inches
(200 cm)
None
79-59 inches
(200-150
cm)
None
None
Arcs —
Center
Arcs —
Right
Audible
Alert
Chime
None
6th Solid
None
None
Radio Volume Reduced
No
Arcs — Left
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
None
None
1st Flashing
5th Solid
4th Solid
None
None
None
3rd Flashing
None
Single 1/2Second
Tone
(for rear
center only)
Yes
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Fast
(for rear
center only)
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
Fast
Yes
Yes
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Yes
1st Flashing
6
1st Flashing
Continuous
Yes
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will
show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
be on.
NOTE: When KeySense feature is present, the ParkSense
System will reject customer input to turn the system off via
the hard switch. The instrument cluster display will show
⬙KeySense in Use Selected Feature Cannot be Disabled⬙
message.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
ParkSense Switch
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition
cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the gear
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will
show the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds while the vehicle is in
REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not operate and will read “OFF” over the arcs.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper
is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, dirt
and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF”. Furthermore, once you
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster display will show “PARKSENSE OFF” message
for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered
with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so
can result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the
fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
6
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
• ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in the
open position.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
OFF if objects, such as bicycle carriers, are placed within
12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to
do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
WARNING! (Continued)
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or
front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or
moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. If your
vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmission, the
vehicle brakes may be automatically applied and released
when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a possible collision with an obstacle.
NOTE:
• The driver can override the automatic braking function
by pushing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off via
ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the automatic brakes are being applied.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
• The automatic braking function may not provide
enough vehicle deceleration to avoid colliding with a
detected obstacle depending on vehicle speed, road
conditions, and brake capability.
• The automatic braking function may not be applied fast
enough for moving obstacles that approach the rear of
the vehicle from the left and / or right sides.
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System.
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
for the automatic braking function through ignition
cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle’s movements.
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and recommendations.
6
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of these
gear selector positions, the system will remain active until
the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above the
system’s operating speed, a warning will appear in the
instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is
too fast. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system, six sensors will be located in the
rear fascia/bumper. Refer to the ⬙ParkSense Active Park
Assist System⬙ section for further information.
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm)
from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction,
depending on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
Rear Sensor Locations
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 in
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation
of the obstacle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
ParkSense Visual Alert
ParkSense Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer - Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System. Refer
to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Rear Park Assist
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has been
detected, the warning display will turn ON indicating the
system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region
and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone
will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
6
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
6
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 inches 47-39 inches
(150-120
(120-100
cm)
cm)
Greater
than
79 inches
(200 cm)
None
79-59 inches
(200-150
cm)
None
None
Arcs —
Center
Arcs —
Right
Audible
Alert
Chime
None
6th Solid
None
None
Radio Volume Reduced
No
Arcs — Left
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
None
None
1st Flashing
5th Solid
4th Solid
None
None
None
3rd Flashing
None
Single 1/2Second
Tone
(for rear
center only)
Yes
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Fast
(for rear
center only)
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
Fast
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
1st Flashing
6
1st Flashing
Continuous
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front Park Assist
When the vehicle is in DRIVE the ParkSense Warning
screen will be displayed when an obstacle is detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right front region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the
display will show a single arc in the center front region. As
the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A fast
sound tone will be produced when reaching the second
flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound tone
when the first flashing arc appears.
No Tone/Solid Arc
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
6
No Tone/Flashing Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Arcs — Left
Arcs — Center
Arcs — Right
Audible Alert
Chime
Radio Volume
Reduced
Greater than
47 inches (120
cm)
None
None
None
None
No
WARNING ALERTS
47-39 inches
39-25 inches
(120-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches (30 cm)
None
4th Solid
None
None
None
3rd Flashing
None
None
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
Fast
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
Continuous
No
No
Yes
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake
pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected from
the Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
If the Uconnect System is equipped, chime volume settings
will not be accessible from the instrument cluster display.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
6
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will
show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
be on.
NOTE: When KeySense feature is present, the ParkSense
System will reject customer input to turn the system off via
the hard switch. The instrument cluster display will show
⬙KeySense in Use Selected Feature Cannot be Disabled⬙
message.
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
ParkSense Switch
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS⬙, or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds. When the gear
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected
a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
show a ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ pop up message for five seconds. After five
seconds, a vehicle graphic will be displayed with ⬙OFF⬙ at
either the front or rear sensor location depending on where
the fault is detected. The system will continue to provide
arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These arc
alerts will interrupt the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙, or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ messages if an object is
detected within the five second pop-up duration. The
vehicle graphic will remain displayed for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ appears in the instrument cluster display make sure
the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the
ignition. If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
operating properly.
6
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for five seconds
while the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the
object is moving. This may cause the automatic braking
application to be delayed.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
WARNING!
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the appropriate fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind or in front of the appropriate fascia/
bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
off if objects, such as bicycle carriers, are placed within
12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object
as a sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instrument cluster.
• ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in the
open position.
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected
at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will
not be detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver
looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to
assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular parking
maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space, providing audible/visual instructions, and controlling the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver maintains
control of the accelerator, gear selector and brakes. Depending on the driver’s parking maneuver selection, the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a perpendicular parking
space on either side (i.e., driver side or passenger side).
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and
must intervene as required.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
• During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver touches
the steering wheel after being instructed to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the system will cancel,
and the driver will be required to manually complete the
parking maneuver.
• The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc., or if
searching for a parking space that has surfaces that will
absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
• New vehicles from the dealership must have at least 30
miles (48 km) accumulated before the ParkSense Active
Park Assist system is fully calibrated and performs
accurately. This is due to the system’s dynamic vehicle
calibration to improve the performance of the feature.
The system will also continuously perform the dynamic
vehicle calibration to account for differences such as
over or under inflated tires and new tires.
6
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active Park
Assist System
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions:
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be enabled
and disabled with the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch,
located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display.
• The parking maneuver is completed.
• Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when
searching for a parking space.
• Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during active
steering guidance into the parking space.
• Touching the steering wheel during active steering guidance into the parking space.
• Pushing the ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist
switch.
• The driver’s door is opened.
• The liftgate is opened.
ParkSense Active Park Assist Switch
To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push
the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once (LED turns
on).
To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push
the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch again (LED turns
off).
• Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking System
intervention.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the
system will cancel and the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only operate
and search for a parking space when the following conditions are present:
Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/
Display
• The driver’s door is closed.
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled
the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK for Perpendicular Park” message will appear in the instrument cluster display. You may switch to perpendicular parking if
you desire. Push the OK button on the left side steering
wheel switch to change your parking space setting.
• The liftgate is closed.
NOTE:
• Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal
indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to
perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active
Park Assist system will automatically search for a parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle if the
turn signal is not activated.
• The gear position is in DRIVE.
• The ignition is in the RUN position.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated.
NOTE: If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to slow down. If the vehicle is driven
above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will
cancel. The driver must then reactivate the system by
pushing the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
• The outer surface and the underside of the front and rear
fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice, mud,
dirt or other obstruction.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
will turn off if any of the above conditions are not present.
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking
space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any
obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding
into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from
surrounding objects/vehicles).
6
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking
sequence.
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Active ParkSense Searching
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands from
the steering wheel.
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands removed
from the steering wheel, you will be instructed to place the
gear selector into the REVERSE position.
6
Parking Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From
Wheel
Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
NOTE:
• It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver.
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE or REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the
system will cancel and the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed
exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance
into the parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them
to slow down. The driver is then responsible for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take full control of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
6
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the DRIVE
position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move forward.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
6
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE
position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
6
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. When the
maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to
check the vehicle’s parking position. If the driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should shift to PARK.
The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position⬙
message will be momentarily displayed.
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled,
the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK for Perpendicular Park” message will show in the instrument cluster
display. Push the OK button on the left side steering wheel
switch to change your parking space setting to a perpendicular maneuver. You may switch back to parallel parking
if you desire.
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the driver pushes OK for a perpendicular parking
maneuver, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK for
Parallel Park” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display.
NOTE:
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal
indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to
perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active
Park Assist system will automatically search for a parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle if the
turn signal is not activated.
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking
space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any
obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding
into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from
surrounding objects/vehicles).
Active ParkSense Searching Display
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular parking
sequence.
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands from
the steering wheel.
6
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Parking Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From
Wheel
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands removed
from the steering wheel, you will be instructed to place the
gear selector into the REVERSE position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE or REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the
system will cancel and the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed
exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance
into the parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them
to slow down. The driver is then responsible for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
Check Surroundings — Move Backwards
NOTE:
• It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver.
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
6
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the DRIVE
position.
Check Surroundings — STOP
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move forward.
6
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE
position.
Check Surroundings — STOP
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
6
Check Surroundings — Move Backwards
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position.
When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to check the vehicle’s parking position. If the
driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should
shift to PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check
Parking Position⬙ message will be momentarily displayed.
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or
perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always
check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle,
look behind and in front of you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up and moving forward. You are responsible for safety and must continue
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors will
not be detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 105 mph (169 km/h). It uses
a forward looking camera to detect lane markings and
measure vehicle position within the lane boundaries.
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning
in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
The LaneSense system will also provide a visual warning
through the instrument cluster display to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel below
the Uconnect display.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts across that lane marking (no turn
signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual
warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single
lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not
be provided.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on
the steering wheel and provides an audible and visual
warning to the driver when the driver’s hands are not
detected on the steering wheel. The system will cancel if
the driver does not return their hands to the wheel.
6
LaneSense Button
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense
button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense On” message is
shown in the instrument cluster display.
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
Instrument Cluster Display
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
is solid white.
and the LaneSense telltale
Lane Sense On Message
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense
button again (LED turns on).
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state on or off from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the instrument cluster display.
System ON (Gray Lines/White Telltale
)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense
is solid white when only the left lane
Telltale
marking has been detected and the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster
display if an unintentional lane departure occurs on
the left side.
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
visual warning in the instrument cluster display will
show the left thick lane line flashing yellow (on/off),
while the left thin line remains solid yellow. The Lanechanges from solid white to flashing
Sense telltale
yellow.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white. The LaneSense telltale
is solid
green when both lane markings have been detected
and the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display and a torque
warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane
departure occurs.
6
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale
)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale
)
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation,
the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid yellow.
changes from solid green to
The LaneSense telltale
solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin
Line/Solid Yellow Telltale
)
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left thin
line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At
this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale
)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity of
the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity
(Early/Medium/Late) that you can configure through the
Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
After five seconds, this note will disappear. The ParkView
Rear Back Up Camera is located on the rear of the vehicle
above the rear license plate.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 105 mph (169 km/h).
6
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,
traction control system, electronic stability control, forward collision warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
on the touchscreen display along with a caution note
“Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen.
ParkView Camera Location
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the
navigation or audio screen appears again.
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned on), the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h),
the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched
to the OFF position.
A touch screen button to disable display of the camera
image is made available when the vehicle is not in REVERSE gear. Display of the camera image after shifting out
of REVERSE can be disabled via a touch screen button
personalization entry in the camera settings menu.
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround View
Camera System that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the surroundings and top view of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or a different
view is selected through the ⬙on screen soft buttons⬙. The
top view of the vehicle will show which doors are open.
The image will be displayed on the touchscreen display
along with a caution note “Check Entire Surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note
will disappear. The Surround View Camera System is
comprised of four sequential cameras located in the front
grille, rear liftgate and side mirrors.
NOTE: The Surround View Camera System has programmable settings that may be selected through the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the rear camera
view and top view is the default view of the system.
6
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned on), the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h),
the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched
to the OFF position. There is a touch screen button (X) to
disable the display of the camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned off), the surround view camera mode is exited
and the last known screen appears again.
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle, including the side
view mirrors and its projected backup path based on the
steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
Modes Of Operation
Top View
Additional camera modes can be selected when the vehicle
is in any gear and the surround view camera system is
activated by pressing the soft key located in the “Controls”
screen or the “Apps” screen in the Uconnect system.
The Top view will show in the Uconnect System with Rear
View and Front View in a split view display. There is
integrated ParkSense arcs in the image at the front and rear
of the vehicle. The arcs will change color from yellow to red
corresponding the distance zones to the oncoming object.
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
Rear View
This is the Default view of the system in
REVERSE and is always paired with the
Top view of the vehicle with optional
active guide lines for the projected path
when enabled.
Rear Cross Path View
Pressing the Rear Cross Path soft key
will give the driver a wider angle view
of the rear camera system. The Top view
will be disabled when this is selected.
ParkSense Arcs
NOTE:
• Front tires will be in image when the tires are turned.
• Due to wide angle cameras in mirror, the image will
appear distorted.
• Top view will show which sliding doors are open.
• Open front doors will remove outside image.
Front View
The Front view will show you what is
immediately in front of the vehicle and
is always paired with the Top view of
the vehicle.
6
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front Cross Path View
Pressing the Front Cross Path soft key
will give the driver a wider angle view
of the front camera system. The Top
view will be disabled when this is selected.
Deactivation
The system can be deactivated in the following conditions:
• The speed of the vehicle reaches greater than 8 mph
(13 km/h).
• The vehicle is out of REVERSE for greater than 10
seconds.
• The vehicle shifted into PARK from a different gear.
• If the vehicle is in any gear other than REVERSE, press
the “X” button.
• The system is turned off manually through the Uconnect
settings menu. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
• If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
• If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see your
nearest authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Surround View Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
the safety of your surroundings and must continue to
pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View should
only be used as a parking aid. The Surround View
camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in
your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using Surround View to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using Surround View.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
1. Press the fuel filler door release button (located in the
driver’s door in the upper map pocket).
6
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. The button press will initiate a sequence of events to
depressurize the fuel system. A message will display in
the cluster letting you know when the vehicle is ready to
be fueled.
• If you hear a hissing sound when the nozzle is inserted
into the filler pipe, wait to begin fueling the vehicle
until after the hissing sound stops.
3. Open the fuel filler door by pressing in the rear area of
fuel door.
Instrument Cluster Message
NOTE:
• After pushing the release button you will have 20
minutes to fuel the vehicle, beyond 20 minutes you
will need to press the release button again.
• The fuel door could take up to 15 seconds to open. It
may take longer to open in some situations, such as
high ambient temperatures.
Fuel Filler Door
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel
door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door
using the inside release button. Do not pry on the door.
4. There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside the
pipe seal the system.
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
5. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe, the nozzle
opens and holds both flapper doors while refueling.
6. Fill the vehicle with fuel, when the fuel nozzle “clicks”
or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
7. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to
allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
8. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper door. A funnel is
provided to open the flapper door to allow emergency
refueling with a gas can.
1. Retrieve funnel from the storage bin located in the left
rear quarter trim.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel
nozzle, ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold both
flapper doors open.
3. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
4. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to putting
back in the spare tire storage area.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
6
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
Emergency Fuel Door Release
1. Access the storage bin located behind the rear cargo trim
panel.
3. Pull the fuel door emergency release to open the fuel
door.
2. Remove access cover in the upper right corner.
Fuel Door Emergency Release
Access Cover Location
4. After removing green handle from retention bracket
then pull. Then re-install handle back into bracket when
completed.
5. Wait 15 seconds and then begin fueling your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
VEHICLE LOADING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Certification Label
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must
be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
6
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The
weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be
determined separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the
vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear
axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to
rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified
weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down
low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing is not permitted with this vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Wheel OFF the Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
All Models
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOTE:
Recreational Towing — All Models
• To avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake engagement,
you must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle. The Auto Park Brake
feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
• When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable
state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial
Highway Safety offices for additional details.
• If your vehicle is disabled and in need of commercial
towing service, please refer to “Towing A Disabled
Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency”.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires towing,
make sure the drive wheels are OFF the ground.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow
dolly (front wheels off the ground) or vehicle trailer (all
four wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly, follow this
procedure:
DRIVING TIPS
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
Acceleration
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the park brake.
4. Place the transmission in PARK.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
7. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do not
start the vehicle.
8. Press and hold the brake pedal.
9. Release the park brake.
10. Turn the ignition OFF.
11. Release the brake pedal.
Driving On Slippery Surfaces
Information in this section will aid in safe controlled
launches in adverse conditions.
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
difference in the surface traction under the front (driving)
wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be
observed:
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
• Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Driving Through Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
water can wear away the road or path’s surface and
cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions and
Warnings before doing so.
6
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
may result in further damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing
water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
(Continued)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . .376
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .406
䡵 ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED . . . .376
䡵 JUMP STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
▫ Preparations For Jump Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
▫ Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
▫ Jump Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
▫ Replacing Exterior Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
䡵 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
▫ Fuse Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . .423
▫ Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . . .398
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . .426
7
376 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the lower
center area of the instrument panel.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the
switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
Assist And SOS Mirror
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a
SOS button.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 377
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so
may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be
operable if your SiriusXM Guardian service is active and
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow,
just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to
someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional
fees may apply for roadside assistance.
• SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for SiriusXM Guardian.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE: In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there
will be a ten second delay before the SOS Call system
initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call
connection, push the SOS call button on the Rearview
Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Device
Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green
LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
7
378 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a SOS operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit the
following important vehicle information to a SOS operator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it
is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s SOS
Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS operator
may be able to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once
the SOS operator opens a voice connection with the
vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator should be able
to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear
sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call
system will attempt to remain connected with the SOS
operator until the SOS operator terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 379
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from an
Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should exit
the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s operable network and GPS antennas. You could prevent
operable network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable network and GPS signal reception
is required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
• The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF
YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER
AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL
NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
(Continued)
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
7
380 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
• The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
WARNING!
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have your authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have your
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited
to, the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.
• Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility.
• Operator error by the SOS operator.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it
is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 381
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection and a GPS signal is required
for the SOS Call system to function properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
7
382 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Lamps
Center & Rear Dome Lamp
Center & Rear Reading Lamps
Front Door Courtesy Lamp
Front Header Reading Lamps – If Equipped
Instrument Cluster Lamps
Liftgate Lamp(s)
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
Removable Console Lamp – If Equipped
Visor Vanity Lamps
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
Bulb Number
(Serviced At Authorized
(Serviced At Authorized
(Serviced At Authorized
(Serviced At Authorized
(Serviced At Authorized
(Serviced At Authorized
(Serviced At Authorized
(Serviced At Authorized
6501966
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 383
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps
Halogen Headlamp
Dedicated Daytime Running Lamp (If Equipped)
Front Turn Signal Lamp
Side Marker Lamp
Front Park Lamp
Front Fog Lamp
LED Front Fog Lamp
Center High Mounted Stop (CHMSL) Lamp
Stop/Turn Signal Lamp
Rear Tail/Side Marker Lamp
Backup Lamp
License Lamp
Bulb Number
Projector Halogen Low Beam - 9005HL+
High Beams - 9005LL
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
PWY24WNA
W3W
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
H11LL
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
W21/5WLL
Rear Tail - Body Side - LED (Serviced at Authorized
Dealer)
Rear Tail - Liftgate - LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Side Marker: W3W
W21W
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
7
384 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Halogen Headlamps
3. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb socket assembly and
rotate counterclockwise to remove from the housing.
1. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the
headlamp bulb cap.
2. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb cap and rotate it
counterclockwise to unlock it.
Headlamp Bulb Socket
4. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and
then connect the replacement bulb.
Headlamp Bulb Cap
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 385
Front Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Twist the front turn signal lamp socket assembly counterclockwise, and then remove the front turn signal
lamp assembly from the lamp housing.
7
Headlamp Bulb
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
5. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
6. Install the headlamp bulb cap in the headlamp housing
and rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
Front Turn Signal Lamp Socket
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replacement bulb.
4. Install the front turn signal lamp socket assembly into
the housing, and rotate the front turn signal lamp socket
clockwise to lock it in place.
386 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Front And Rear Side Marker Lamps
1. Remove the three fasteners from the inner wheel liner
and carefully peel back liner for access.
Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb Removal
3. Remove bulb from the front side marker lamp socket
and replace with a new bulb.
Inner Wheel Liner Fasteners
2. Firmly grasp the front side marker lamp socket and
rotate 1/4 turn counterclockwise to remove it from the
lamp assembly.
4. Install front side marker lamp socket in lamp assembly
and rotate 1/4 turn clockwise to lock into place.
5. Position the inner wheel liner in place and install the
three fasteners.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 387
Front Fog Lamp — Halogen
1. Remove fasteners from inner wheel liner and carefully
peel back liner for access.
CAUTION!
2. Reach through the front fascia to fog lamp housing to
access the bulb.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
3. Rotate the front fog lamp bulb counterclockwise, and
remove the bulb from the front fog lamp housing.
5. Install the front fog lamp bulb into the front fog lamp
housing, and rotate the bulb clockwise to lock it in place.
6. Position the inner wheel liner in place and install
fasteners.
Rear Liftgate Mounted Back-Up Lamps And Tail
Lamps (If Bulb Equipped)
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry off the
bulb access cover on the lower liftgate trim.
3. Back-up lamps/tail lamp (if bulb equipped) are now
visible. Rotate socket(s) counter clockwise.
Front Fog Lamp Socket
4. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and
then connect the replacement bulb.
4. Remove/replace bulb(s).
5. Reinstall the socket(s)
6. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
7
388 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Bodyside Mounted Taillamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove two torx head screws on bodyside lamp using
a T30 screwdriver.
3. Remove lamp from vehicle body and locate bulb socket
on rear of lamp. Rotate socket counter-clockwise.
4. Remove/replace bulb(s).
5. Reinstall the socket(s)
6. Reverse process to reinstall the lamp onto vehicle.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The center high-mounted stop lamp is an LED assembly.
See your authorized dealer for replacement.
Rear License Lamp
The rear license lamps are LED. See your authorized dealer
for replacement.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice
versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 389
General Information
Fuse Location
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive current.
The fuses are grouped into controllers located in the engine
compartment.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the vehicle off may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses, micro-fuses, circuit breakers and
relays. A label that identifies each component is printed on
the inside of the cover.
Before any procedure is done on the PDC, make sure
engine is turned off.
Remove the cover by unlatching the two locks located at
each side of the PDC cover, avoid the usage of screw
drivers or any other tool to remove the cover, since they
may apply excessive force and result on a broken/
damaged part.
Blade Fuses
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade fuse with a good/functional fuse element.
3 — Blade fuse with NOT functional / BAD fuse element (blown
fuse)
7
390 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
After service is done, secure the cover with its two locks.
Power Distribution Center
Cavity
F06
F07
F08
F09
F10
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
Blade Fuse
15 Amp Blue
25 Amp Clear
25 Amp Clear
–
15 Amp Blue
F11
–
15 Amp Blue
Description
Low Temp Active Pump
Ignition Coil/Fuel Injector
Amplifier / ANC
Not Used
High Temp Aux Pump &
HV Electric Coolant Htr
Enable
ELCM / FTIV
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 391
Cavity
F12
F13
F14A
F14B
F15
F16
F17
F18
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
40 Amp Green
–
–
40 Amp Green
Blade Fuse
5 Amp Tan
–
10 Amp Red
–
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
F25A
–
–
20 Amp Blue
–
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
F25B
F26
F27
–
40 Amp Green
25 Amp Clear
–
–
Description
Battery Sensor (IBS)
Not Used
Media Hub 1, 2, 3
Pwr Lumbar Switch
CBC / Power Locks
ECM
Not Used
CBC Feed #4 (Exterior
Lights #1)
Not Used
Low Temp Passive Pump
PIM - Park PAWL Motor
Not Used
Not used
RR Wiper
Handsfree (Lt & Rt Rear
Door Release Module)
Active Grill Shutter
Front HVAC Blower Motor
RR Slide Door Module - RT
7
392 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
F28A
F28B
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
Blade Fuse
10 Amp Red
F29
F30A
F30B
F31
F32
F33
F34
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
25 Amp Clear
–
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
–
–
–
F35
F36
F37
25 Amp Clear
–
40 Amp Green
–
–
–
F38
F39
F40
F41
F42
–
25 Amp Clear
20 Amp Blue
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Description
Diagnostic Port
USB + AUX (UCI) Port (IP)
/ Video USB Port
Not Used
ECM / PIM
Not Used
3, 4 way Valves
ECM
Power Liftgate Module
Rear Door Control Module
- Lt
Sunroof Control Module
Not Used
CBC Feed #4 (Exterior
Lighting / PCM #2)
Not Used
Rear HVAC Blower Motor
Trans Oil Pump
Not Used
Not Used
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 393
Cavity
F43
F44
Cartridge Fuse
–
30 Amp Pink
Blade Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
–
F45
F46
F47
F48
F49
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
25 Amp Clear
–
–
–
–
–
F50
25 Amp Clear
–
F51
F52
F53
F54
F55A
30 Amp Pink
–
–
40 Amp Green
–
–
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
F55B
–
Description
Fuel Pump Motor
CBC Feed #1 (Interior
Lights)
Power Inverter
Driver Door Module
Passenger Door Module
EBCM Motor
Rear Sliding Door Module Lt
Rear Door Control Module
- Rt
Front Wiper
Not Used
Not Used
ESP-ECU And Valves
RF Hub/KIN/ESL - BUX
Only
DVD / VRM
7
394 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
F56A
Cartridge Fuse
–
Blade Fuse
10 Amp Red
F56B
–
F57
F58
F59
F60
F61
F62
F63
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
–
20 Amp Yellow
5 Amp Tan
F64
F65
F66
–
–
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
F67
–
10 Amp Red
F68
–
–
Description
FRT. & RR HVAC CTRL/
OCM / ESL
B. EPS / ESC - Electric Stability Ctr
PIM - Main Power Supply
Not Used
Not Used
Rear Cargo APO
Not Used
PIM-Main PWR Supply
HV Elect Coolant HTR Enable
Not Used
Not Used
Instrument Panel Cluster
(IPC) / SGW
HALF / PTS / Drivers Assist System Module
(DASM)
Not Used
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 395
Cavity
F69A
F69B
F70
F71
F72
F73
F74
F75
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
30 Amp Pink
–
–
Blade Fuse
15 Amp Blue
5 Amp Tan
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
–
5 Amp Tan
F76
–
20 Amp Yellow
Description
BPCM
BPCM (Redundant)
EAC
Horn
Not Used
Rear Defroster (EBL)
Not Used
Overhead Console / Rear
ICS
Uconnect / DCSD / Telematics
7
396 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
F77A
Cartridge Fuse
–
Blade Fuse
10 Amp Red
F77B
–
F78A
–
15 Amp Blue
F78B
F79A
–
–
10 Amp Red
F79B
F80
F81
F82
F83
–
–
–
–
30 Amp Pink
5 Amp Tan
5 Amp Tan
–
–
Description
Rear Entertainment / Media HUB / 3RD & 2ND
Row USB CHRG / Vacuum
Cleaner SW Backlight /
3RD Row Recliner SW
Backlight / 2ND Row Stow
N Go SW Backlight /
LT&RT Sliding Door Backlight
B. Sunroof / Rain sensor /
Rear View Mirror / PIM
Transmission control Module (TCM) / E-Shifter
Instrument Cluster
ICS / Frt & Rr HVAC /
EPB Sw / SCCM
Not Used
OBCM
APM
Not Used
Trans Oil Pump 1
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 397
Cavity
F84
F85
F86
F87
F88
F89
F90
F91
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Blade Fuse
–
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
5 Amp Tan
15 Amp Blue
F92A
F92B
F93
F94
F95A
F95B
F96
–
–
–
40 Amp Green
–
–
–
5 Amp Tan
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
F97
–
10 Amp Red
F98
–
–
10 Amp Red
Description
Not Used
Cigar Lighter
Not Used
Not Used
Front Heated Seats
Rear Heated Seats
EBCM - ECU
Front Ventilated Seats/
Heated Steering Wheel
Security Gateway
Not Used
Not Used
ESC - Motor Pump
USB Charge Only Port
Selectable Fuse Location
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (Airbag)
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (Airbag)
Not Used
7
398 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
F99
F100A
F100B
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
Blade Fuse
–
10 Amp Red
Circuit Breakers
25 Amp
25 Amp
–
CB1
CB2
CB3
* 30A mini fuse is substituted for 25A Circuit Breaker.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
NOTE: Your vehicle is not equipped with a jack or spare
tire. This section describes wheel removal and installation.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
Description
Not Used
QVPM
Rr Camera / LBSS / RBSS
/ CVPM / Humidity Snsr
/ In Car Temp Snsr
Power Seat (Driver)
Power Seat (Pass)*
Not Used
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 399
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Place the ignition in OFF mode.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set the transmission
in PARK.
• Do not let any passenger sit in the vehicle when it is
on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
7
400 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side of
the vehicle body indicated by the triangular lift point
symbol on the sill molding. Do not raise the vehicle
until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
Jack Locations
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 401
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where
it can be raised on a lift.
7
Front Jack Engaged
Front Jack Location
402 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Jacking Location
Rear Jack Engaged
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
3. Raise the jack until the jack head is properly engaged in
the described location. Do not raise the vehicle until
you are sure the jack is securely engaged.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 403
4. Raise the vehicle by using the jack. Raise the vehicle
only until the tire just clears the surface and enough
clearance is obtained to remove the desired tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do
not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the
hub.
6. Install the wheel back onto the vehicle once ready.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
7
Installing Tire
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the tire with the valve stem facing
outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the inflatable spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
7. Secure the wheel to the hub by tightening the nuts with
wrench. Once the vehicle is lowered you will have a
second opportunity to “torque” the lug nuts.
8. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
404 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifications” for proper wheel
lug nut torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or at a service station.
9. Lower the jack to its fully lowered position.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Mounting Stud
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting
studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install
the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward
the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve
stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand, snapping
the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a hammer or
excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 405
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifications” for proper wheel
lug nut torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or at a service station.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in the “Technical Specifications” section for
proper wheel lug nut torque. If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
7
406 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Service Kit.
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can
be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will provide a temporary tire
seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles
(160 km) with a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is secured with a strap and is stored in
the storage bin located behind the rear cargo trim panel.
Tire Service Kit Location
Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 407
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn
to this position for air pump operation
only.
7
Tire Service Kit Components
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Mode Select Knob
Sealant/Air Hose
Hose Accessories
Sealant Bottle
Power Plug
Power Switch
Deflation Button
Pressure Gauge
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn
to this position to inject the Tire Service
Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire.
408 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button once
to turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and
release the Power Button again to turn
Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce the
air pressure in the tire if it becomes
over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior to the
expiration date (printed at the lower right hand corner
on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the
system. Refer to “Sealant Bottle Replacement” in this
section.
• The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and needs
to be replaced after each use. Always replace these
components immediately at your original equipment
vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, clean
water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from the
vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the sealant
dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on
the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal
punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the
tread/contact surface of your vehicle’s tires.
• The Tire Service Kit Sealant is not intended to seal
punctures on the tires’ side walls.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate bicycle
tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in the
Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the air
pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflatable
items. However, use only the Air Pump and make sure the
Mode Select Knob is in the Air Mode when inflating such
items to avoid injecting sealant into them.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 409
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service
Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under
the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the
wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
source.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty
of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do
not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
7
410 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the
fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose
onto the valve stem.
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to reach the
valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit
when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Place the transmission in PARK and cycle the ignition in
the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the cap from
the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails)
from the tire.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 411
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:
1. Always start the vehicle before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to the Sealant Mode
position.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
seconds through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve stem. Make
sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
Sealant Hose to the valve stem. Check that the Mode
Select Knob is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air
Mode. Push the Power Button to turn On the Tire
Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt power
outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
Make sure the vehicle is running before turning ON the
Tire Service Kit.
3. After pushing the Power Button, the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant
Bottle through the Sealant Hose and
into the tire.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to previous use.
Call for assistance.
7
412 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant
Hose:
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer
flowing through hose (typically takes
30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows
through the Sealant Hose, the Pressure Gauge can read as high as 70 psi
(4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge will
decrease quickly from approximately
70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire
pressure when the Sealant Bottle is empty.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle is empty.
Continue to operate the pump and
inflate the tire to the cold tire inflation
pressure found on the tire and loading information label located in the
driver-side door opening. Check the
tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge.
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
1. Push the Power Button to turn off the Tire Service Kit.
2. Remove the speed limit label from
the Tire Service Kit and place sticker
on the steering wheel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant
Hose from the valve stem, reinstall
the cap on the fitting at the end of the
hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in
the vehicle storage location. Proceed
to “Drive Vehicle.”
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 413
Drive Vehicle:
After Driving:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10
minutes to ensure distribution of the
Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
To Use Tire Service Kit” in this section before continuing.
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove the cap from
the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have
the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until
the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you. Have
the tire checked as soon as possible at your authorized
dealer.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem, and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant
Hose onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
7
414 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the fitting at the end of the
hose onto the valve stem.
6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and turn to the Air Mode
position.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire Service Kit and
inflate the tire to the cold tire inflation
pressure found on the tire and loading information label located in the
driver-side door opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated,
push the Deflation Button to reduce the
tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the
vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the steering wheel
after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. Refer to “Sealant Bottle Replacement”.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 415
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
3. Remove the bottle cover.
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
1. Unwrap the power cord.
2. Unwrap the hose.
7
Remove The Bottle Cover
Unwrap The Hose
416 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to release.
Remove The Bottle
Rotate The Bottle Up
5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.
NOTE:
• For sealant bottle installation, follow these steps reverse
order.
• Replacement sealant bottles are available at authorized
service centers.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 417
JUMP STARTING
The vehicle requires its 12V battery power to ⬙turn-on⬙ the
vehicle’s high voltage battery. The high voltage battery is
used to charge the 12V battery, provide electric vehicle
operation, and to start the vehicle’s gas engine. If the 12V
battery has been discharged, the vehicle can be ⬙jump
started⬙ using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack.
If the vehicle’s high voltage battery has also been discharged, it will need to be recharged before the vehicle can
be started:
• If the vehicle can be connected to a Level 1 or Level 2
charger where it is currently parked, the vehicle will still
require a ⬙jump start⬙ to allow the vehicle to begin the
battery charging process. Once the vehicle charging has
begun (indicated by the charge status indicator on top
the vehicle’s instrument panel), the jumper cables can be
removed from the vehicle jump posts.
• If the vehicle cannot be connected to a Level 1 or Level
2 charger where it is currently parked, the vehicle can be
moved by connecting 12V power to the vehicle’s ⬙jump
posts⬙ and then shifting the transmission from PARK
into NEUTRAL. Power provided by the jumper cables
will also allow the electric park brake to be released.
Carefully move the vehicle to a level 1 or Level 2 charge
location. While the vehicle is being moved, the external
12V power must remained connected to the vehicle
jump posts.
NOTE: Be careful when moving the vehicle - ensure that
control of the vehicle is maintained. Also, ensure that
vehicle is secured to prevent unintentional movement
during and after moving the vehicle. If the external 12V
power becomes disconnected from the vehicle jump posts
or there is an interruption of the 12V power while moving
the vehicle, the vehicle’s transmission may engage PARK.
When the vehicle is at the charging location, shift the
transmission back to PARK, apply the electric park brake,
and start the high voltage battery charging. Once the
vehicle has been secured against unintentional movement
and high voltage battery charging has been initiated, the
jumper cables can be removed from the vehicle jump posts.
Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so
please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
7
418 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations For Jump Start
The remote battery posts in your vehicle is located on the
left side of the engine compartment.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
Volts or damage to the battery, alternator or electrical
system may occur.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Negative Battery Post
2 — Positive Battery Post
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 419
WARNING!
WARNING!
You can be seriously injured or killed working on or
around a motor vehicle:
• Keep hands away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automatically and
may start at any time, whether the engine is running
or not.
• Remove any jewelry such as rings, watches and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact.
• Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive.
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
1. Apply the parking brake and place the ignition to OFF.
NOTE: If the 12V Battery has been sufficiently discharged,
this may not be possible.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the 12V electrical
system, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach,
set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
7
420 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the negative post near the windshield cowl
(exposed metal post of the discharged vehicle).
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the
vehicle run a few minutes, and then cycle the ignition to
ON/RUN in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the ignition is cycled to ON/RUN, select the gear
that is needed for moving the vehicle. In most instances
of an emergency, this would be neutral. Once the proper
gear is selected, remove the jumper cables in the reverse
sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
the ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle,
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 421
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located with the
spare tire (if equipped) or in the upper storage bin. If your
vehicle is out of fuel and an auxiliary fuel can is needed,
insert the funnel into the filler neck and proceed to fill the
vehicle.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
WARNING!
Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel
For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System refer to
“Refueling The Vehicle” in “Starting And Operating ” in
this manual.
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
7
422 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the
normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn
the vehicle off immediately, and call for service.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more
than half a second, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels
or holding down the accelerator pedal.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before
rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Safety” for further information. Once the
vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to
restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
(Continued)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 423
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
• Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in
NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five
rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
7
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Flatbed
Wheel OFF The Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
ALL MODELS
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
424 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle (if rear wheels are on
the ground), to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake
engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or
disabled via the customer programmable features in the
Uconnect Settings.
• Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical
failure when the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) is engaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear
wheels off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a
flatbed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe engine and/or transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Vehicle Recovery Tow Points
Your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Recovery Points that
can be used to recover a disabled vehicle, located on the
underbody of the vehicle.
NOTE:
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
• Ensure that the towing service tow hooks are properly
seated and secured in the attachment points.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must
towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels
raised).
• This recovery tow feature should be used by a trained
professional only.
NOTE: Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
• Use approved receptacle location to free the disabled
vehicle from its environment.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 425
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Be applied parallel to the center line of the length of
the vehicle.
• Not be an abrupt acceleration.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, not the ACC mode.
Front Recovery Points
CAUTION!
Recovery feature:
• Is to be used by a professional ONLY.
• Is used only to provide recovery of the vehicle.
• Is NOT to be used to recover secondary vehicle.
• Is NOT to be used for transporting the vehicle over
the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.
Recovery load should:
• Be applied at constant speed.
(Continued)
NOTE: The Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park
Brake whenever the driver’s door is opened (if the ignition
is ON, transmission is not in PARK, and brake pedal is
released). If you are towing this vehicle with the ignition in
the ON/RUN mode, you must manually disable the Electric Park Brake each time the driver’s door is opened, by
pressing the brake pedal and then releasing the EPB.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling-type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
7
426 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SCHEDULED SERVICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
▫ Maintenance Plan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — HYBRID . . . . . . . .433
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
䡵 RAISING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
䡵 TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
▫ Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
▫ Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
▫ Accessory Drive Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Tire Chains (Traction Devices) . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
▫ Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .479
8
428 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
䡵 STORING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
䡵 BODYWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Protection From Atmospheric Agents . . . . . . . .482
▫ Body And Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .483
▫ Preserving The Bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
䡵 INTERIORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Seats And Fabric Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Plastic And Coated Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Leather Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
▫ Glass Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 429
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, or extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500
miles (805 km).
NOTE: Even though the vehicle may not have been driven,
both the fuel in the tank and oil in the engine will still
degrade over time. Additionally, there will be a notification
to the driver if the engine is being run to maintain the oil
and fuel systems.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to “Vehicle Info” in “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake
master cylinder, fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page
for the required maintenance intervals.
8
430 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter
Rotate the tires
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
Inspect exhaust system
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function.
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler pulley, and replace if necessary.
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter.
Replace spark plugs.(**)
Flush and replace the engine, power electronics, and
battery coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km), whichever comes first.(***)
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
32,000
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 431
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
(**) The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
(***) Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact your local authorized dealer.
8
432 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This type
of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 433
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — HYBRID
8
1 — Battery Coolant Reservoir*
2 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
5 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
* See your authorized dealer for service.
6 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
7 — Engine Air Cleaner
8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
9 — Power Electronics Coolant Reservoir*
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
434 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Checking Oil Level
Adding Washer Fluid
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut OFF.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the
oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the
MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines.
CAUTION!
• Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration, or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
• Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
Windshield Washer Fluid Cap
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine
compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate
the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual
washer fluid.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid, apply it to a cloth or towel, and wipe clean
the wiper blades; this will help blade performance.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 435
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING! (Continued)
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting
Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
8
436 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION! (Continued)
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Even if the vehicle is driven, such that it operates primarily
in electric mode, the engine oil still requires changing. An
engine oil change maintenance reminder message will be
provided based on vehicle use and time since last oil
change. Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” in this section
for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Gasoline Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 437
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20,
0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine
oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity
Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
8
438 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters
and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 439
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt
body)
• Rib or belt wear
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
• Belt slips
• “Groove jumping⬙ (belt does not maintain correct position on pulley)
• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
8
440 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard
or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such
as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected
for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced
at an authorized dealer.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
WARNING! (Continued)
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–1234yf
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located in your owner’s
information kit, for further warranty information.
(Continued)
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
POE compressor oil, and refrigerants.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 441
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (Cabin Air
Filter)
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the
glove compartment. Perform the following procedure to
replace the filter:
1. Remove all contents from the glove compartment.
Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether Clip
2. Open the glove compartment door partially, leaving
extra slack on the glove compartment tension tether.
Detach the glove compartment tension tether by sliding
the black tension tether clip down, and popping it out of
the slot on the side of the glove compartment door.
8
442 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. There are glove compartment travel stops on either side
of the glove compartment door. To release them, push
inward on each travel stop, and pull the glove compartment door down until the travel stops pass clear of their
hooking points.
5. Pry up the lid of each individual compartment snap,
and detach it from the rest of the snap. There is a small
space on the side of each snap to use for separating the
lid from the snap. Once detached, remove the rest of the
snap completely from the compartment cover.
4. Open the glove compartment door as far as possible to
gain access to the cabin air filter compartment cover.
6. After removing the snaps, lift up the compartment cover
to gain access to the fresh air inlet.
Cabin Air Filter Compartment Cover
Fresh Air Inlet
1 — Compartment Cover
2 — Compartment Snap
1 — Filter Cover
2 — Retaining Tab
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 443
7. Remove the filter cover by prying back each of the
retaining tabs from their hooking points, and then
pulling out the filter cover to expose the cabin air filter.
Remove the air filter by pulling it straight out of the
housing.
8. Install the new air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to
properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
9. Once the filter is replaced, reinstall the filter cover,
making sure the retaining tabs are fully secured into
their housings.
10. Close the cabin air filter compartment cover, and
reinsert the snaps into their slots. Push the snap lids
until fully attached.
11. Push the glove compartment door to the near closed
position to reengage the glove compartment travel
stops. Finally, pull the glove compartment tension
tether clip down and slide it back into the slot on the
side of the glove compartment door.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
8
444 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the following points:
• Wear Or Uneven Edges
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield.
• Foreign Material
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
• Hardening Or Cracking
• Deformation Or Fatigue
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
be damaged.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 445
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip
up the release tab on the wiper blade and while holding
the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper blade
down towards the base of the wiper arm.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from the
wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper blade
toward the right side of the vehicle to separate the wiper
blade from the wiper arm).
8
446 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is
in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the
wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and the blade
side of the wiper facing up and away from the windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the
opening in the wiper blade under the release tab.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm
and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush against the
wiper arm. Fold down the latch release tab and snap it
into its locked position. Latch engagement will be
accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 447
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to
allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
8
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Blade
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grasp
the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper arm
with your right hand. With your left hand hold the
wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from the
wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the wiper
blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end of the
wiper arm.
448 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE: Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade, move
the wiper blade upward and away from the wiper arm
to disengage.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to
allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without
unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the
vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on the
end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the wiper
arm with one hand, and press the wiper blade flush
with the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the
wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Arm Receptacle
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 449
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
8
450 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in
gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Do not put your hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
near the radiator cooling fan. The fan may start at any
time, whether the ignition is on or off.
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• Turn vehicle OFF and disconnect the fan motor lead
before working near the radiator cooling fan.
(Continued)
Cooling Fan Warning Label
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 451
This vehicle is equipped with an electric cooling fan mounted
behind the radiator that starts automatically, and may start at
any time. Your vehicle may determine the fan needs to start
and to run if vehicle coolant is too hot, if the ambient air
temperature is too high, or if the vehicle is charging and the
hood is open. Even after the vehicle is turned off, the fan may
start without warning and run for several minutes. Be aware of
this if you are working in the engine compartment. Always
keep fingers and tools away from the fan blades.
The radiator fan and surrounding components must be
serviced by your authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer.
Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation
of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water
from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the
coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be
added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Electric/Battery Coolant System
These coolant systems must be serviced by your authorized dealer. If the coolant level is below what is specified
on the reservoir, contact your authorized dealer for service.
These systems require the use of high purity water, such as
deionized, or distilled water, when mixing the water and
coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality
water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
cooling systems. If the coolant level of the battery coolant
system is low, the wrench warning light will be illuminated
on the instrument cluster.
8
452 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Selection Of Coolant
CAUTION! (Continued)
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved coolant (OAT
coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended
maintenance intervals. This coolant (antifreeze) can be
used up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same coolant
(OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life
of your vehicle.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 453
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (antifreeze) that meets
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
When adding coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT coolant that meets
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032
and deionized, or distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated.
• Use only high purity water such as deionized, or distilled water when mixing the water/coolant (antifreeze)
solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the
amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain
the proper level of protection against freezing according to
the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
NOTE:
• Mixing coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended
and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and
OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
• Low pressure expansion bottles for power electronics
and battery cooling require a special tool for removing
the cap from the expansion bottle. For the battery
coolant bottle, it is important to not add coolant if level
is low. The vehicle should be taken to dealer for proper
servicing of the battery coolant loop if this should occur.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
8
454 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With the engine off and cold, the level of the coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the “MAX” and
“MIN” lines marked on the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain
the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle.
Do not overfill.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
See your authorized dealer for service
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children,
do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If
ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 455
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and
deionized, or distilled water.
• Use only high purity water such as deionized, or distilled water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the cooling
system.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• The coolant freeze point in the battery and power
electronics loop should be checked by a dealer as a
special tool is required to remove the cap from those
expansion bottles.
• Electric/Battery coolant system must be serviced by
your authorized dealer. If the coolant level is below what
is specified on the reservoir, contact your authorized
dealer for service. These systems require the use of high
purity water such as deionized, or distilled water when
mixing the water and coolant (antifreeze) solution. The
use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of
corrosion protection in the cooling systems.
8
456 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when
performing under hood services or immediately if the
“Brake Warning Light” is illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid
level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to
fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be
checked when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information. Using the
wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your
brake system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also
identified on the original factory installed hydraulic
master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in
a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder
reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open
container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a
lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in
sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.
(Continued)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 457
WARNING! (Continued)
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission performance and/or durability. Refer to
“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for fluid specifications
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
8
458 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fluid Level Check
Fluid Changes
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required; therefore the transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check
your transmission fluid level using special service tools. If
you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit
your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Routine fluid changes are not required. However, change
the fluid if it becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if
the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to
an authorized dealer or service station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 459
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
8
460 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 461
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
8
462 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards
and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the
tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 463
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
8
464 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 465
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
For further information on GAWRs, and vehicle loading,
refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
8
466 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• Trailer towing is not permitted with this vehicle.
• The following table shows examples on how to calculate
total load and cargo/luggage capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 467
8
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
468 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• Economy
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
NOTE:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 469
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pockettype pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
8
470 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 471
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
8
472 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
• Driving style.
Replacement Tires
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
Life Of Tire
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled
maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 473
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer
or original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can
cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering
and suspension components. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
8
474 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Snow Tires
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure
adversely affect the safety and handling of
designation or
sidewall. Use
to do so may
your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 475
Spare Tires — If Equipped
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
8
476 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the
electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 477
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
8
478 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
the water droplets from the brake components. This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage:
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on front tires only.
• For a 235/65R17 or 235/60R18 tire, use of a snow
traction device with a maximum projection of 9 mm
beyond the tire profile is recommended.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 479
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
(Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
8
480 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does
not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
Tire Rotation
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the
tires on your vehicle.
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 481
WARNING!
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
STORING THE VEHICLE
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of
the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
• Check that the Electric Park Brake is not engaged.
If the vehicle should remain stationary for more than a
month, observe the following precautions:
• Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and possibly airy
location the windows open slightly.
• Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the battery
post and be sure that the battery is fully charged. During
storage check battery charge quarterly.
• If you do not disconnect the battery from the electrical
system, check the battery charge every 30 days.
• Clean and protect the painted parts by applying protective waxes.
8
482 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• Clean and protect polished metal parts by applying
protective waxes.
• Apply talcum powder to the front and rear wiper blades
and leave raised from the glass.
• Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover taking care
not to damage the painted surface by dragging across
dirty surfaces. Do not use plastic sheeting which will not
allow the evaporation of moisture present on the surface
of the vehicle.
• Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar)
higher than recommended on the tire placard and check
it periodically.
• Do not drain the vehicle cooling system.
• Whenever you leave the vehicle is stationary for two
weeks or more, run idle the vehicle for approximately
five minutes, with the air conditioning system on and
high fan speed. This will ensure a proper lubrication of
the system, thus minimizing the possibility of damage to
the compressor when the vehicle is put back into operation.
• Plug in the vehicle when not using it whenever possible.
NOTE: The hybrid has feature of periodic wake-up that
occurs every 21 days. This feature charges the 12V battery
from the high voltage battery. This will happen as long as
the high voltage battery remains above the minimum state
of charge. Refer to “Starting The Engine” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
CAUTION!
Before removal of the positive and negative terminals
to the battery, wait at least a minute with ignition
switch in the OFF position and close the drivers door.
When reconnecting the positive and negative terminals
to the battery be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
position and the drivers door is closed.
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road
surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 483
cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Preserving The Bodywork
The most common causes are:
Washing
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
8
484 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
WARNING!
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents
or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun
damage can also weaken the fabric.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 485
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
8
486 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
NOTE: If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer
more so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and FCA recommends Mopar total care leather
cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
䡵 IDENTIFICATION DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
▫ Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . .492
▫ Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications . . . . . .492
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .488
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
䡵 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
9
488 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA
BRAKE SYSTEM
Vehicle Identification Number
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and
potential activation of the “Brake System Warning Light.”
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left front
corner of the instrument panel and is visible from outside
of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also
appears stamped under the right front seat and printed on
the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a
window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the brakes
will still function. However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required with the
power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 489
Torque Specifications
Lug
Nut/Bolt
Torque
100 Ft-Lbs (135
N·m)
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
M12 x 1.5
Lug
Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
19 mm
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is
fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway).
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
WARNING!
Wheel Mounting Surface
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
9
490 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
These engines are designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide optimum fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded
“Regular” gasoline having a posted octane number of 87 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of higher
octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it will not
provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these
engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 491
Materials Added To Fuel
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as ethanol.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When available, the usage of Top Tier Detergent
gasoline
is
recommended.
Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15%
ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
9
492 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
MMT In Gasoline
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed
natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 493
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
9
494 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engines
16.5 Gallons
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20 , API
5 quarts
Certified)
Cooling System*
14.5 Quarts
3.6 Liter Engine Coolant (Mopar
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula with deionized,
or distilled water for proper corrosion protection)
Battery Coolant (Contact your autho5 Quarts
rized dealer for service)
Power Electronics Coolant (Contact
3.7 Quarts
your authorized dealer for service)
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
NOTE: Battery Coolant and Power Electronics Coolant
reservoir require a special tool to service the coolant
system. Contact your authorized dealer for service.
Metric
62 Liters
4.7 liters
13.7 Liters
4.7 Liters
3.5 Liters
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 495
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Battery Coolant
Power Electric Coolant
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) with deionized, or distilled water for proper corrosion protection or equivalent meeting the requirements
of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) with deionized, or distilled water for proper corrosion protection or equivalent meeting the requirements
of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) with deionized, or distilled water for proper corrosion protection or equivalent meeting the requirements
of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to
your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
9
496 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 497
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Refrigerant
Compressor Oil
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE
J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
Use only refrigerant R-1234yf
Charge Amounts:
Single A/C System — 880g (1.94 lb)
Dual A/C System — 1050g (2.31 lb)
Use only POE:
Single A/C System — 140 ml
Dual A/C System — 190 ml
9
MULTIMEDIA
CONTENTS
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
▫ Uconnect Theater Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
▫ Accessing The System From The Uconnect Theater
Rear Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
䡵 CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
4C/4C NAV Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Pairing The Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Unpairing The Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
▫ Media Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . . .528
▫ Uconnect Theater Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . .537
▫ Left Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
▫ Uconnect Theater Home Screen And Controls . . .538
▫ Right Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
䡵 AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
▫ Play A DVD/Blu-ray Or USB Media File From
Uconnect System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
䡵 UCONNECT THEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .530
▫ Uconnect Theater Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
▫ Accessing The System From The Uconnect
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
▫ Disc Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
▫ Blu-ray Controls – Disc Specific Functions . . . . .543
▫ Uconnect Theater Apps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
▫ Using The Rear Video USB Port. . . . . . . . . . . . .545
10
500 MULTIMEDIA
▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
▫ Basic Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
▫ Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
▫ Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed . . . .550
▫ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
▫ Rear Climate Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
▫ Climate (4C/4C NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
▫ Accessibility — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
▫ Navigation (4C NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
▫ Wireless Streaming — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . .552
▫ SiriusXM Guardian (4C NAV) — If Equipped . . .570
▫ BD And DVD Region Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
▫ Register (4C NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
▫ Product Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
▫ Mobile App (4C NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV). . . . . . . . . . . . .571
▫ FCC/IC Regulatory Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
▫ Apple CarPlay — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .561
▫ Android Auto — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . . .561
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
䡵 VOICE COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
▫ Introducing Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . .575
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
MULTIMEDIA
501
UCONNECT RADIOS
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio, refer
to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE: Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your
vehicle.
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
Personalized Menu Bar
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an
existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
The new shortcut will now be an active App/shortcut on
the main menu bar.
10
502 MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
MULTIMEDIA
503
NOTE:
UCONNECT SETTINGS
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly
regarding software updates.
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and/or buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allow you to access and
change the customer programmable features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/softwareupdate to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Data Collection & Privacy” in “Uconnect + SiriusXM Guardian” in your
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement and “Onboard
Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel”.
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect
touchscreen.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below, and in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a
Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn
the control knob to scroll through menus and change
settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the control knob
one or more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON,
OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off and back
arrow buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the
Uconnect screen. Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.
Push the Back Arrow button on the faceplate to exit out of
a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
10
504 MULTIMEDIA
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
4C/4C NAV Settings
NOTE:
• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may
vary.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Buttons On The Touchscreen And
Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Press the “Apps
” button, then press the “Settings
” button on the touchscreen to display the menu
setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows
you to access all of the available programmable features.
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting “option” until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu, or press the “X” button on the
touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the screen
will allow you to toggle up or down through the available
settings.
KeySense
The vehicle’s KeySense settings are protected by a unique
four digit PIN, which the vehicle owner creates when
accessing the specific settings for the first time. This four
digit PIN can only be reset by an authorized dealer.
MULTIMEDIA
505
After pressing the “KeySense” button on the touchscreen,
and entering the KeySense PIN, the following settings will
be available:
Setting Name
Forward Collision Sensitivity
Forward Collision Warning Active Braking
Near
Selectable Options
Medium
Far
NOTE:
When the “Forward Collision Warning Active Braking” feature is selected, the ABA applies additional brake pressure
when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes
active at 5 mph (8 km/h).
ParkSense — If Equipped
Sound Only
Sound and Display
NOTE:
The “ParkSense” system setting will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h), when enabled. It will provide an alert (audible and/or
visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with “Sound Only,” or “Sound and Display.”
10
506 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Front ParkSense Volume
Rear ParkSense Volume
Rear ParkSense Braking
Assist
Low
Low
Selectable Options
Medium
Medium
High
High
NOTE:
When the “Rear ParkSense Braking Assist” feature is selected, the park assist system will detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
Blind Spot Alert — If
Lights
Lights & Chime
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, it will alert, visibly and/or audibly, to indicate objects are in your
blind spot. The “Blind Spot Alert” feature can be activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. When “Lights &
Chime” mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors as well as an
audible alert when the turn signal is on. If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is
located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to
specification.
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Maximum Vehicle Speed
507
Selectable Options
+
-
NOTE:
The “Maximum Vehicle Speed” feature can be set to 65, 70, 75, 80, or 85 mph (90, 95, 100, 105, 110 km/h).
SiriusXM Setup
Channel Skip
Subscription Information
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to skip channels. To make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
10
508 MULTIMEDIA
Language
After pressing the “Language” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Language
Selectable Options
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set
Language” button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
MULTIMEDIA
509
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Display Mode
Display Brightness With
Headlights ON
Selectable Options
Manual
+
Auto
-
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Display Brightness With
+
Headlights OFF
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Set Theme
NOTE:
When the “Set Theme” feature is selected, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection,
press the ⬙Set Theme⬙ button on the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark appears showing that the setting has been selected.
10
510 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Touchscreen Beep
Selectable Options
Control Screen Time-Out —
If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Time-Out” feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before
the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster — If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the instrument cluster display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Ready To Drive Pop-Up
On
Off
MULTIMEDIA
511
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Units
Selectable Options
Custom
NOTE:
The “Custom” option allows you to set the “Speed” (MPH, or km/h), “Distance” (mi, or km), “Fuel Consumption”
[MPG (US), MPG (UK), L/100 km, or km/L], “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C, or °F) units of
measure independently.
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Voice Response Length
Show Command List
10
Selectable Options
Brief
Always
Detailed
With Help
Never
512 MULTIMEDIA
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped
Set Time Hours
Selectable Options
+
-
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Set Time Minutes
+
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Time Format
12hrs
24hrs
Show Time in Status Bar — If Equipped
MULTIMEDIA
513
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
ParkView Backup Camera
Delay — If Equipped
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image
with dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled
if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to
the OFF position.
ParkView Backup Camera
Active Guide Lines — If
Equipped
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or
dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering
wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist
with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
10
514 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Surround View Camera
Selectable Options
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera” feature displays a complete 360 degree view of the vehicle’s exterior environment
while backing up.
Surround View Camera
On
Off
Delay
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the 360 degree view
image with guidelines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if
the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the
OFF position.
Surround View Camera
Guidelines
NOTE:
The “Surround View Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines” feature allows you to see active guidelines over the
Surround View camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or the Surround View button on the
touchscreen is pushed. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display.
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Sliding Door Alert
515
Selectable Options
NOTE:
When the “Sliding Door Alert” feature is selected, a chime plays when the sliding door reverses or an obstacle is
sensed.
LaneSense Warning — If
Early
Medium
Late
Equipped
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system will warn you, through steering
wheel feedback, of a possible lane departure.
LaneSense Strength — If
Low
Medium
High
Equipped
Blind Spot Alert — If
Off
Lights
Lights and Chime
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will show a
visual alert in the outside mirrors, or it will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as play an audible alert
when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged,
the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
10
516 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Rain Sensing Wipers
Selectable Options
Hill Start Assist — If
Equipped
Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse
Brake Service
NOTE:
The “Brake Service” feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu
driven system, to command the electric park brake retraction, to service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers, rotors, etc.).
MULTIMEDIA
517
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec
Selectable Options
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the vehicle is shut off.
Flash Lights With
On
Off
Sliding Door
Headlights With
Wipers — If
Equipped
Headlight Illumi0 sec
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
nated On Approach
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time
the headlights remain on after the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
10
518 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Auto Dim High
Beams— If
Equipped
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
Daytime Running
On
Off
Lights
Flash Lights With
On
Off
Lock
MULTIMEDIA
519
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE: The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by
your authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Setting Name
Personal Settings Linked to Key
Fob — If Equipped
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
The “Personal Seetings Linked to Key Fob” feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility
when entering and exiting the vehicle.
The seat will return to the memorized seat location, if the settings is set to “On,” when the key fob is used to unlock
the door.
Power Liftgate Alert
On
Off
NOTE:
When the “Power Liftgate Alert” feature is selected, an alert plays when the power liftgate is raising or lowering.
10
520 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Sliding Door Alert
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
When the “Sliding Door Alert” feature is selected, a chime plays when the sliding door reverses or an obstacle is
sensed.
Hands Free Lift Gate
On
Off
Hands Free Sliding Door
On
Off
Auto Unlock On Exit
On
Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock
On
Off
Sound Horn With Lock — If
Off
1st Press
2nd Press
Equipped
Sound Horn With Remote Start
On
Off
— If Equipped
Passive Entry
On
Off
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
521
Selectable Options
Driver
All
NOTE:
When the “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks” feature’s “Driver” option is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on
the first push of the key fob unlock button; you must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s
doors. When “All” is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is
programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is
programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle more than
once will only result in the driver’s door opening once. If the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock
switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto-On Driver Heated/
Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start
— If Equipped
Off
Selectable Options
Remote Start
10
All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on.
522 MULTIMEDIA
Vehicle Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Vehicle Off Power
Delay — If
Equipped
0 sec
Selectable Options
45 sec
5 min
10 min
NOTE:
When the “Vehicle Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system
(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for
up to ten minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the vehicle is shut off.
Easy Exit Seat — If
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, it provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility
when entering and exiting the vehicle.
MULTIMEDIA
523
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Balance/Fade
Selectable Options
Speaker Icon
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the “Speaker Icon”
toward any location in the box.
Equalizer
Bass
Mid
Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting, as well as
press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume
Off
1
2
3
Surround Sound — If Equipped
On
Off
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
+
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Loudness — If Equipped
10
524 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Paired Phones
Selectable Options
List Of Paired Phones
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Paired Audio Sources
List Of Paired Audio Sources
NOTE:
This feature shows which Audio Sources are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to
the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
MULTIMEDIA
525
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Channel Skip
Selectable Options
List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info
Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
10
526 MULTIMEDIA
Accessibility — If Equipped
After pressing the “Accessibility” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Accessibility
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
The “Accessibility” feature announces a function prior to performing the action selected when using DVD/Blu-ray
functions, when it is activated. For example, when activated, and the “Play” button is selected, the system will announce “Play Button Selected”, and then once pressed again the “Play” button will perform its action.
Reset
After pressing the “Reset” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Restore Settings
Selectable Options
OK
Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data
OK
Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and
presets.
MULTIMEDIA
527
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
System Information
Selectable Options
System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, a “System Information” screen will appear, displaying the system software version.
10
528 MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
positions. Both controls are rocker-type switches with a
push-button in the center.
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
“Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.
Left Switch
• The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode the radio
is in.
Right Switch
Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/
AUX, etc.).
• The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
MULTIMEDIA
529
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL
There are multiple USB “charge only” ports in this vehicle.
There are numerous USB ports located throughout the
vehicle. This feature allows an external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
• In the center console
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
• Above the rear cup holders in the third row of seats
• On the back of the front row seats in the Uconnect
Theater Media hubs
10
Center Console USB Charging Port
Front Center Stack AUX Jack And USB Ports
1 — USB Port
2 — Aux Jack
3 — Uconnect Theater USB Port
530 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT THEATER — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect Theater Overview
Your Uconnect Theater is designed to give your family
years of enjoyment.
There are multiple ways to interact with your Uconnect
Theater system.
• Play your favorite CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray Discs
• Plug and play a variety of standard video games or
devices into the HDMI port
Rear USB Charging Ports
NOTE: The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge battery
operated USB devices when connected.
• Listen to audio over the wireless headphones
• Plug and play a variety of devices into the Video USB
port
• Plug in standard headphones to listen to audio
• Project your mobile phone, or tablet screen onto the rear
Uconnect Theater touchscreens — If Equipped
Please review this Owner’s Manual to become familiar
with its features and operation.
MULTIMEDIA
Getting Started
Accessing The System From The Uconnect Radio
Uconnect Theater Screen
1 — Uconnect Theater Touchscreen (Rear Touchscreens)
2 — Uconnect Radio (Front Touchscreen)
3 — Uconnect Theater Media Hub (AUX Output, HDMI Input, USB
Charge Only Port)
There are three different ways to operate the features of the
Uconnect Theater:
• The Remote Control
• The Uconnect Radio
• The Individual Uconnect Theater Touchscreens
531
Uconnect Theater Button
You can access your Uconnect Theater system from the
radio touchscreen following the steps below:
Option 1
1. Press the “Media” button.
2. Press the “Uconnect Theater” button icon.
10
532 MULTIMEDIA
Option 2
Uconnect Theater Controls
1. Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the Uconnect Theater button on the touchscreen.
You may need to navigate to different pages in the Apps
section to find the Uconnect Theater button.
NOTE: The Uconnect Theater icon may be dragged and
dropped down from the Apps menu to the personalized
menu to create an App/shortcut. Refer to “Personalized
Menu Bar” in this section for more information.
Uconnect Theater Summary Screen
1 — Power All On/Off (Controls Both Screens)
2 — Mute All On/Off (Controls
Both Screens)
3 — Lock All On/Off (Controls
Both Screens)
4 — Source Drop Down List
Current Screen
5 — Lock On/Off Current
Screen
6 — Mute On/Off Current
Screen
7 — Power On/Off Current
Screen
MULTIMEDIA
533
Parents can control certain features of the system with the
“Uconnect Theater Controls” screens, right from the
Uconnect touchscreen radio. Options include:
• Change media sources or select APPS
• Lock one or both screens
• Mute an individual screen or both screens
• Turn on/off one or both screens
• View media showing on a specific screen while gear
selector is in PARK
• Listen in to a particular Uconnect Theater screen
through the vehicle’s sound system by selecting the
“Listen In” feature after selecting the “Press to Enter”
option.
Individual Main Screen Listen In Feature
Accessing The System From The Uconnect
Theater Rear Screens
You can also access your Uconnect Theater system from the
rear screens from the steps below:
1. Lift screen upward, the system will automatically power
on.
NOTE: A message asking if you would like to pair a
remote will pop up if one has not already been paired to
the system.
10
534 MULTIMEDIA
2. If “YES” is selected to Pair a Remote, press any button
on the remote and pairing will immediately start.
Pairing The Remote
3. If “NO” is selected, the Uconnect Theater home screen
will pop up.
NOTE:
• There will be a touchscreen notification message when
pairing is successful.
• Test to make sure the remote is successfully paired by
dragging your finger across the gesture pad. If you do
not see the on screen arrow, try using the “Screen”
button on the remote to switch between rear screen one
and rear screen two to make sure the remote is controlling the intended screen. It may take several seconds for
the remote to react when initially paired.
• If remote does not pair, refer to “Pairing The Remote”
section for an alternative pairing process.
Remote Pairing
If the remote needs to be paired to your Uconnect Theater
system, follow the procedure below:
1. Install batteries into both remotes.
2. Press the Settings icon found in the lower right portion
of the Uconnect Theater touchscreen.
MULTIMEDIA
3. Press the “Remote” button towards the bottom of the
Uconnect Theater touchscreen, within the settings
menu.
4. Press the “Pair Remote” option. Press the “OK” button.
A touchscreen notification will appear indicating that
your remote has been paired successfully or unsuccessfully.
535
Unpairing The Remote
In events such as updating the Uconnect Theater software,
or taking a remote to another vehicle, the remote will need
to be unpaired from your Uconnect Theater system. To
unpair the remote:
1. Press the Settings icon found in the lower right portion
of the Uconnect Theater touchscreen.
5. Test to make sure the remote is successfully paired by
dragging your finger across the gesture pad. If you do
not see the on screen arrow, try using the “Screen”
button on the remote to switch between rear screen one
and rear screen two to make sure the remote is controlling the intended screen. It may take several seconds for
the remote to react when initially paired.
2. Press the “Remote” button towards the bottom of the
Uconnect Theater touchscreen, within the settings
menu.
NOTE:
4. Once complete, the remote will be ready to pair again.
• If remote is ever non-operational, try re-pairing remote.
NOTE: There will be a touchscreen notification message
when unpairing is successful. Repeat the above steps to
unpair a second remote.
• The system can accommodate up to ten paired remote
controls.
3. Select “Manage Remote Controls” from the Remote
section of ⬙Settings” and follow the on screen instructions to complete the unpairing process.
10
536 MULTIMEDIA
Users can select content for each screen from the front radio
touchscreen by choosing desired content from the “Select
Input” drop down menu. Options include Blu-Ray Disc,
HDMI, USB, Apps, and Viewing the other rear screen.
Media Sources
NOTE: Use the “View Screen” function to pull content
from one screen to the other in a single press of a button.
Doing this however will disable and gray out certain
player controls on the screen viewing the other screen’s
content.
Media Source Selection
1 – Selected Source Screen 1
2 – Screen 2 Source Selection Drop Down
MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect Theater Remote Control
537
5. Fast Forward Button
— Push and hold to fast
forward through the current audio track or video
chapter. Push once to skip to the next track.
6. Play/Pause Button
disc play.
㥋 — Begin/resume or pause
7. Fast Rewind Button
— Push and hold to fast
rewind through the current audio track or video
chapter. Push once to revert back to the previous
track.
8. OK Button — Push to select the highlighted option in a
menu.
Remote Control
1. Gesture Pad — Control pointer position by running
your finger over this area and tapping to select items on
the touchscreen, functions similar to a mouse.
2. Mute Button — Mutes headphone audio.
3. Home Button — Push to access available “Sources”.
buttons
4. Arrow Buttons — Push the arrow
to highlight an item or scroll through menus.
9. Screen Selector Button — Push the screen selector to
toggle between screen 1 (Driver Side), or screen 2
(Passenger Side).
10. Back Button — Push to exit out of menus or return to
previous screen.
11. Power Button — Turns the screen for the selected
Channel on or off.
12. Screen Indicator — Indicates which screen (1 or 2) is
being controlled by the remote control.
10
538 MULTIMEDIA
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
Uconnect Theater Home Screen And Controls
Each remote control requires two AAA batteries for operation.
To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery recycling
procedures for your area.
3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown inside the battery
compartment.
4. Replace the battery compartment cover.
Uconnect Theater Home Screen (Rear Touchscreens)
1 — Search Button (Front USB
Media Search)
2 — Power Button
3 — Settings Button
4 — Toggle Button List And
Icon View
5—
6—
7—
ton
8—
9—
Source Card Page Indicator
Wired Headphone Volume
Rear Climate Control ButHome Button
Source Cards
MULTIMEDIA
539
General Settings
To change source card order, select “Source Card Reorder”,
then press and hold source card on the touchscreen, and
drag and drop in desired order.
You can also adjust settings such as:
• Brightness
• Media port lighting on and off
• Clock on and off
Source Card Selection
You can choose sources such as HDMI, USB, Apps, or
Blu-ray. You may also view content of the opposite screen
in one step by choosing the “View Screen” source card.
NOTE: System information can also be displayed under
General Settings.
Remote Settings
Under this setting, you can access the following:
• Manage Remotes (this allows you to unpair remotes)
NOTE:
• Pair Remote
• Source card order can be changed by pressing the
Settings button on the touchscreen and scrolling down
to ⬙Source Card Order⬙.
• Remote sensitivity (This adjusts the speed and sensitivity of cursor on screen when using gesture pad)
• Use the “View Screen” function to pull content from one
screen to the other in a single press of a button. Doing
this however will disable and gray out certain player
controls on the screen viewing the other screen’s content.
10
540 MULTIMEDIA
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Play A DVD/Blu-ray Or USB Media File From
Uconnect System
1. Insert a Blu-ray disc or DVD disc into the disc player
with the label facing up. Or insert a USB drive into rear
Video USB port.
NOTE: The DVD/Blu-ray Disc player and Video USB port
are both located under the radio controls in the instrument
panel.
2. Press the “Uconnect Theater” button on the radio touchscreen.
Refer to “Accessing The System From The Uconnect Radio” in this section for further information.
3. Select Disc or USB from the source controls (i.e. select
the desired source from the “Select Input 1” or “Select
Input 2” menu for the respective screen).
4. For DVD/Blu-ray disc – press the “Press to Enter”
feature in the Movie Snapshot on radio touchscreen,
then press “OK” on following screen. The steps to start
a DVD are dependent on the steps required by that
specific DVD. For USB Media Files - Press Music, Movie,
or Folders, then select media title from list(s).
5. To play a DVD/Blu-ray disc on both screens simultaneously, select disc from both screen drop downs, or
choose disc source on one screen and push “View
Screen” button on the other.
MULTIMEDIA
541
DVD Blu-ray Disc Player
1 — Disc Player (Rear)
2 — Rear Video USB Port
Source Controls From The Uconnect Radio — Uconnect
Theater
10
542 MULTIMEDIA
2. Mute
Mute rear headphones for selected source for the current
ignition cycle. Pressing mute again will unmute rear headphones.
3. Lock
Press to enable/disable Remote Control functions and Rear
Touchscreen Controls for the selected source.
4. View
Select this button to view full screen video if vehicle is not
moving. Button is disabled when not viewing a video
source or when the vehicle is in motion.
5. Listen In
Uconnect Radio Media Control Screen
NOTE: After selecting “Press to Enter” or the Movie
Snapshot the control functions for that screen will appear.
These controls only apply to the individual screen selected
and include:
1. Power
Press to turn “Selected Screen” On/Off.
Select this button to play one of the rear screens audio over
the vehicle’s audio system.
NOTE: To view video content on the radio screen, bring the
vehicle to a stop.
MULTIMEDIA
543
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio disc, CD Data disc, DVD or
Blu-ray, pushing the remote control’s arrow buttons will
navigate the cursor on the rear touchscreen in the desired
direction, on whichever touchscreen is selected. The UP,
DOWN, LEFT, and RIGHT arrow buttons, and the OK and
MENU buttons on the remote, along with the corresponding buttons overlaid on the radio touchscreen, can be used
to navigate the disc menu when it appears. This can be
used to select specific chapters in a movie, navigate special
features, or to play the movie from the menu.
NOTE: Inserting a disc into the player will “auto play” the
disc if already in the ⬙Disc⬙ source menu on the rear
screens.
Blu-ray Controls – Disc Specific Functions
The four colored buttons (red, green, blue, yellow) are
designed for use with certain Blu-ray disc movie titles to
access particular features or software on the disc. See the
documentation provided with your Blu-ray disc movie to
see if these buttons can be used. The 5-way control buttons
located to the right of the four colored buttons, are used to
navigate and select items in the disc’s menu, like play
movie, scene selection, etc.
Rear Touchscreen Blu-ray Controls – Disc Specific
Functions
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Red Button
Green Button
Blue Button
Yellow Button
5 — 5-Way Control Buttons
6 — Move 5-Way Controls Button
10
544 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect Theater Apps
Sudoku App Home Screen
Apps Home Screen
Select the Apps source card to play pre-loaded games. Pressing the “Help” button teaches users how to play each game.
Pick from games:
• Back Seat Bingo
• Checkers
• Hanging Fruit
• License Plate Game
• Math Flash Cards
• Solitaire
• Sudoku
• Tic Tac Toe
MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: To exit a game, push “Exit Button” then “Back
Arrow,” or “Home Button” on the touchscreen.
Are We There Yet? — Uconnect 4C NAV
545
When a navigation route has been set from the Uconnect
radio, the second row passengers can use “Are We There
Yet?” for an animated screen showing distance and time
remaining on navigation routes, as well as the estimated
time of arrival with pop-up notifications. Notifications and
their frequency can be set up for route information by
using the arrow buttons, and can be turned on and off
using the “Notifications” button on the “Are We There
Yet?” App. Estimated time of arrival notifications will
pop-up at the bottom center of the screen.
Using The Rear Video USB Port
10
Are We There Yet? App
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Decrease Timing Between Notifications Button
— Notifications ON/OFF Button
— Increase Timing Between Notifications Button
— Arrival Time
— Time Remaining Until Destination Is Reached
— Distance Remaining
Rear Video USB Port
546 MULTIMEDIA
Plug in a USB drive, iPhone, iPod or mass storage device
and play your favorite music or movies.
NOTE: To view USB media on the rear theater screens,
insert a USB drive into the port next to the DVD/Blu-ray
disc player. The USB drive port is located under the radio
controls in the instrument panel.
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the HDMI 1 or 2 ports,
located behind the first row seat.
AUX/HDMI/USB
1 — AUX Jack (Headphone Output Only)
2 — HDMI Port
3 — USB Port (Charge Only)
Search Screen
On the rear screen you can browse the content of the USB
device by going to the USB source. Use the search feature
to find your music faster.
NOTE: Certain high-end video games will exceed the
power limit of the vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to
“Power Inverter” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” in
this guide for further information.
MULTIMEDIA
547
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screens.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control
there are a number of things that can be done to troubleshoot the issue:
• Verify that the screen is turned on.
• Check to see that the channel is not muted.
• Make sure that the headphones are on.
• Verify that the headphone channel selector button is on
the desired channel. This button switches between the
audio of screen 1 and screen 2.
• Install two new AAA type batteries in the headphones.
Uconnect Theater Headphones
1 — Power ON/OFF Button
2 — Volume Control Wheel
3 — Channel Selector Button
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
NOTE: Uconnect Theater must be turned on before sound
can be heard from the headphones. To conserve battery life,
the headphones will automatically turn off approximately
three minutes after the Uconnect Theater system is turned
off.
10
548 MULTIMEDIA
Changing The Audio Mode For Headphones
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
1. Ensure the remote control and the headphones are on
the same channel.
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
operation.
2. Push the Home button on the remote control.
To replace the batteries:
3. When the Home menu appears on the touchscreen, use
the arrow buttons on the remote control to navigate to
the available modes and push the OK button to select
the new mode or use the Gesture Pad at the top of the
remote control.
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover downward.
2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery recycling
procedures for your area.
3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown inside the battery
compartment.
4. Replace the battery compartment cover.
Delphi Automotive Stereo Headphone Lifetime
Limited Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers the
initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this particular
Delphi Automotive (⬙Delphi⬙) wireless headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transferable.
Headphone Channel Selector Button
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts as
long as you own the Product.
MULTIMEDIA
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal use
is defective in workmanship or materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty does
not cover any damage or defect that results from misuse,
abuse or modification of the Product other than by Delphi
Automotive. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam is available for a nominal charge). DELPHI
AUTOMOTIVE IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES OR
DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTING
FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN,
THE PRODUCT, NOR IS DELPHI AUTOMOTIVE LIABLE
FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions may
not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights.
You may also have other rights, which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Will Delphi Automotive Do? Delphi Automotive, at
its option, will repair or replace any defective Product.
549
Delphi Automotive reserves the right to replace any discontinued Product with a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT,
SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING
DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY FOR MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
If you have any questions or comments regarding your
Delphi Automotive wireless headphones, or to register
your wireless headphones, please phone:
1-888-293-3332
Display Settings
When watching a video source, pushing “Settings”
icon
on the touchscreen activates the Settings menu. These
settings control the appearance of the video on the
screen. The factory default settings are already set for
optimum viewing, so there is no need to change these
settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, use one of the touchscreens or
remote. To reset all values back to the original settings,
select the “Reset to Defaults” then select “YES.”
10
550 MULTIMEDIA
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
Rear Climate Controls
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
screen closed:
The rear climate controls can also be controlled using the
Uconnect Theater system. Refer to “Climate Controls” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
• Close the video screen.
• When the screen is reopened, the video screen will
automatically turn back on and show the appropriate
display menu or media.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, push the
remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If audio is
still not heard, check that fully charged batteries are
installed in the headphones.
Icon
ON
OFF
Rear Climate Controls
Description
ON Button
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Controls off.
MULTIMEDIA
Icon
551
Description
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the rear interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount.
Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for more information.
Rear Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Push the button on the touchscreen
to increase or decrease the temperature. The temperature will get warmer as you move up toward the
red arrow and colder as you move down toward the blue arrow.
Headliner
Mode
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct
the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
10
Bi-Level
Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the
headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor
Floor Mode
552 MULTIMEDIA
Icon
Mode
Description
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation.
Accessibility — If Equipped
Accessibility is a feature of the DVD/Blu-ray/USB Video
system that announces a function prior to performing the
action. For further information refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia.”
Choose the Wireless Streaming Source Card on your rear
Uconnect Theater touchscreen.
Wireless Streaming — If Equipped
Your Uconnect Theater System may be equipped with
Wireless Streaming functionality that allows you to project
your smartphone or tablet onto your rear Uconnect Theater
touchscreens. This Source Card will allow you to wirelessly
link your compatible Android devices to your Uconnect
Theater system and stream your device onto the touchscreens.
Wireless Streaming Source Card
MULTIMEDIA
The first row passengers can also access wireless streaming
by choosing the source in the Uconnect Theater menu on
the front Uconnect touchscreen.
553
NOTE: Refer to your device’s user manual or www.uconnectphone.com for further information.
3. Select the Pacifica Wireless Network from the list of
available networks on your device
4. When prompted by an Authentication Screen, press
Accept on the touchscreen to begin wireless streaming
on your device. If prompted, verify that the code on the
rear touchscreen and the device match.
Streaming Source On Front Uconnect Touchscreen
10
NOTE: For system compatibility, consult your device’s
owner’s manual or www.uconnectphone.com to see if your
device supports wireless streaming technology compatibility. Apple devices do not support this feature.
To link your device to the rear Uconnect Theater touchscreens:
1. Enable your device’s Wi-Fi
2. Select the Wireless Streaming feature on your device
Streaming Device Source Card
Your phone will be added as an additional source card on
the Uconnect Theater touchscreens.
554 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: The Authentication Screen will appear on both rear
touchscreens. The touchscreen screen on which “Accept” is
selected will be the primary controller for the wireless
streaming session.
Settings
Below is a list of the settings available for the Wireless
Streaming feature of your Uconnect Theater system:
NOTE:
• Some devices will allow you to control your device
through the Uconnect Theater rear touchscreens. They
will react to your selections from the touchscreen and be
represented on your device as well. When supported,
the Uconnect Theater task bar will appear at the top and
bottom of the Uconnect Theater touchscreen, framing
your streaming device.
• Devices that do not support this feature will not respond
to Uconnect Theater touchscreen but can still be controlled using the streaming device.
Wireless Streaming Settings
• Wireless: ON/OFF – Turn on and off the wireless feature
of the Uconnect Theater system.
• Manage Devices – Allows the user to delete the paired
devices.
• Local Network Name – Allows the user to rename the
Pacifica Wireless Network.
MULTIMEDIA
Refer to the Wireless Streaming video on Mopar’s Youtube
Channel at www.youtube.com/DriveUconnect for tips and
additional information on the Wireless Streaming function.
BD And DVD Region Codes
Many BD and DVD discs are coded by geographic region.
These region codes must match in order for the disc to play.
If the region code for the BD or DVD disc does not match the
region code for the Blu-ray Disc player, the disc will not play.
USA and Canada are set for BD : code A / DVD : code 1.
Recorded Discs
The Blu-ray Disc player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a CDROM containing MP3, AAC or WMA files. The player will
also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or
DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or recorded) are not supported. Compressed audio and DivX
recorded on DVD is playable.
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the Blu-ray Disc player may not be able to
play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
compatible format and is playable on other players. To help
avoid playback problems, use the following guidelines
when recording discs.
555
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are closed
are playable.
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CDAudio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
each track number is unique.
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the ISO9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format. Other
formats (such as HFS, or others) are not supported.
• The player recognizes a maximum of 2000 files and 255
folders (includes the ROOT folder) per CD-R and
CD-RW disc.
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play the
Video_TS portion of the disc.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is playable
in the Blu-ray Disc player, check with the disc recording
software publisher for more information about burning
playable discs.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
DVD player.
10
556 MULTIMEDIA
Compressed Audio Files (MP3, WMA and AAC)
The Blu-ray Disc player is capable of playing MP3
(MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3), WMA (Windows Media Audio)
files and AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) from a CD Data
disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW) or DVD Data disc (usually
a DVD-R or DVD-RW).
• The Blu-ray Disc player always uses the file extension to
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
end with the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3” and WMA
files must always end with the extension “.wma” or
“.WMA” and AAC files must always end with the
extension and “.aac” or “.AAC” or “m4a”. To prevent
incorrect playback, do not use these extensions for any
other types of files.
• For MP3 files, ID3v1, ID3v2 tag data (such as artist
name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
• Any file that is copy protected (such as those downloaded from many online music stores) will not play. The
Blu-ray player will automatically skip the file and begin
playing the next available file.
• Other compression formats such as MP3 Pro, Ogg
Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The Blu-ray player
will automatically skip the file and begin playing the
next available file.
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 32 and 320Kbps
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
between 16 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
supported. For both formats, the recommended sample
rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
• To change the current file, use the remote control “Seek
Forward” or “Seek Back” buttons to return to the start of
the current or previous file.
• AAC (MPEG-4 AAC, Low Complexity Profile) support.
• AAC HE v1 (AAC High Efficiency v1 aka. AAC/
MPEG4v2 AAC+) support.
• HE-AAC v1, v2 support.
Disc Errors
If the Blu-ray Disc player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc
Error⬙ message is displayed on the rear screen and Radio
displays. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible disc format are
all potential causes for a ⬙Disc Error⬙ message.
MULTIMEDIA
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
visible errors that persists for two seconds, the Blu-ray Disc
player will attempt to continue playing the disc by skipping forward one to three seconds at a time. If the end of
the disc is reached, the Blu-ray Disc player will return to
the beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of
the first track.
The Blu-ray Disc player may shut down during extremely
hot conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior temperature is above 140° F (60.0° C). When this occurs, the
player will display ⬙High Temp⬙ and will shut off the Rear
Seat displays until a safe temperature is reached. This
shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the Blu-ray
Disc player.
Product Agreement
Open Source Software
The software built into this product, are composed of
multiple software components, and there are the copyrights of our company or third parties in each software
component. Also, in this product, the following open
source software has been installed.
• The licensed software for our company is based on GNU
GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE V2.0 (⬙GPL⬙).
557
• The licensed software for our company is based on GNU
LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE V2.1 (⬙LGPL⬙).
• The software which has the copyrights of a third party
and is distributed as free software.
Please refer the contract details which are disclosed in the
following websites, for example, concerning these above
software. http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl2.0-standalone.html, http://www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl2.1-standalone.html, http://www.freetype.org/FTL.TXT.
You have the right of acquisition, modification, and distribution of the source code of the GPL/LGPL software.
These are distributed in the hope that it will be useful by
itself. However, including the absence of an implied warranty on the ⬙suitability for a particular purpose⬙ or ⬙merchantability⬙, the warranty of any kind will not be made.
You may download Source Code from the indicating URL
by the pressed button of “Open Source Software” on the
Setup Menu. Also, please refrain from contact about the
contents of the source code of open source. The source code
of the software in which there are the copyrights of our
company or third parties, is not subject to distribution.
10
558 MULTIMEDIA
kernel 2.6.16.29
FreeType 2 2.2.1
gcc sh4eb 3.4.5
glibc 2.3.5
libgcc_s-3.4.5
libtermcap 2.0.8
bash-3.0-31
mtd-utils 20050619
busybox 1.00
initscripts 8.11.1-1
MAKE DEV 1.1.0
libstdc+ +3.4.5-10
coreutils 6.9
dosfstools 2.10-3
directfb 1.0.0-rc1
kxml 1.21
v2lin 0.1
-
-
-
boot_loader sh-ipl +g
1.00
module-init-tools 3.1.0
libiconv 1.11
binutils-sh4eb
2.16.91.0.2
-
Dolby
BDA
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
“Blu-ray Disc, Blu-ray, BD-Live, BONUSVIEW, AVCREC
and the logos are trademarks of the Blu-ray Disc Association.”
DTS
AVCHD
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the
Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered
trademarks, and DTS 2.0 Channel is a trademark of DTS,
Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
⬙AVCHD⬙ and the ⬙AVCHD⬙ logo are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation.
DVD
⬙The DVD logo” is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo
Licensing Corporation.⬙ or ⬙ DVD logo is a trademark of
DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation registered in the
U.S., Japan and other countries.⬙
BD-J
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
MPEG
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND
MULTIMEDIA
NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (⬙AVC VIDEO⬙) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC
VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL
ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO
PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO
LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR
ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY
BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://
WWW.MPEGLA.
DivX
This DivX Certified device has passed rigorous testing to
ensure it plays DivX video. To play purchased DivX
movies, first register your device at vod.divx.com. Find
your registration code in the DivX VOD section of your
device setup menu. DivX, DivX Certified and associated
logos are trademarks of DivX, LLC and are used under
license.
Cinavia
⬙Cinavia Notice This product uses Cinavia technology to
limit the use of unauthorized copies of some commerciallyproduced film and videos and their soundtracks. When a
prohibited use of an unauthorized copy is detected, a
559
message will be displayed and playback or copying will be
interrupted. More information about Cinavia technology is
provided at the Cinavia Online Consumer Information
Center at http://www.cinavia.com. To request additional
information about Cinavia by mail, send a postcard with
your mailing address to: Cinavia Consumer Information
Center, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.” “This
product incorporates proprietary technology under license
from Verance Corporation and is protected by U.S. Patent
7,369,677 and other U.S. and worldwide patents issued and
pending as well as copyright and trade secret protection for
certain aspects of such technology. Cinavia is a trademark
of Verance Corporation. Copyright 2004-2012 Verance
Corporation. All rights reserved by Verance. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
CAUTION!
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
10
560 MULTIMEDIA
General Information
Interference statement
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Wireless notice
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure
limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets
the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines and
RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This
transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
FCC/IC Regulatory Notices
FCC Class B digital device notice
Modification Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate this equipment.
MULTIMEDIA
561
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can
be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one
or more of the following measures:
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation when not
using Uconnect (if equipped).
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
USA/CANADA
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
CAN ICES-3 (B) / NMB-3 (B)
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
Regulatory And Safety Information
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human
body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or
10
562 MULTIMEDIA
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
before turning on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
1. Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
2. Consult an authorized dealer or an experienced radio
technician for help.
MULTIMEDIA
VOICE COMMANDS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your Uconnect system.
563
NOTE: If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in the
Apps menus, of your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect
4C NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passenger
conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is located in the headliner and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the
beep, then say your Voice Command.
Uconnect 4C NAV
10
564 MULTIMEDIA
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• “Cancel” to stop a current voice session
• “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the top of the
touchscreen.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive
A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions. For
4C/4C NAV Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions
3 — Push To End Call
MULTIMEDIA
565
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want
to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say
“Help.” The system will provide you with a list of
commands.
10
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• “Tune to” ninety-five-point-five FM
• “Tune to Satellite Channel” Hits 1
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Radio
566 MULTIMEDIA
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available
for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD player
optional and not available on all vehicles.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to AUX
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your USB device. Your Voice Command
must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre
information is displayed.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Media
MULTIMEDIA
567
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
following commandsѧ
. After the beep, say one of the
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
button
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work.”
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone
10
568 MULTIMEDIA
Climate (4C/4C NAV)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free
and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Climate
MULTIMEDIA
569
Navigation (4C NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on the
Uconnect 4C system.)
. After the
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
beep, say: “Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn
Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
. After
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Navigation
10
570 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM Guardian (4C NAV) — If Equipped
CAUTION!
Some SiriusXM Guardian services, including SOS Call
and Roadside Assistance Call will NOT work without
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compatible with your device.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the SiriusXM Guardian services in the next
section of this guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started.
NOTE: SiriusXM Guardian is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska, Hawaii, and Canada. Services can only be used
where coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
SOS Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Send & Go
Vehicle Finder
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn & Lights
Roadside Assistance Call
Vehicle Health Reports**
Vehicle Health Alert**
Performance Pages Plus**
**If vehicle is equipped.
Register (4C NAV)
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in your
vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guardian services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps.
MULTIMEDIA
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian Customer Care agent who will activate services in your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to activate
on the web.
For further information:
• U.S. residents visit: siriusxm.com/guardian
• Canadian residents visit: siriusxm.com/guardian/ca
Mobile App (4C NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and playing your favorite music in your car.
571
To use the Uconnect App:
• Download the Uconnect App to your mobile device.
• Press the Info button on the navigation bar at the bottom
of the app for Vehicle Info.
• Press the Remote button on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app to Lock/Unlock, Remote Start, and
activate your horn and lights remotely.
• Press the Location button on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app to bring up a map to locate your
vehicle or send a location to your vehicle’s navigation
system.
• Press the Settings button in the upper left corner of the
app to bring up app settings and access the Assist Call
Centers.
NOTE:
For
further
DriveUconnect.com.
information
please
visit
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check
a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM
Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of
information right to your Uconnect 4C NAV system.
Mobile App
10
572 MULTIMEDIA
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped
Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to interact
with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system,
and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your
iPhone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone 5, or higher, to one of
the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning
cable, and press the new CarPlay icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple
CarPlay. Press and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel, or press and hold the “Home” button within Apple
CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice
commands to use a list of your iPhone’s features:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
• Additional Apps
SiriusXM Travel Link
MULTIMEDIA
573
Android Auto — If Equipped
Android Auto allows you to use your voice to interact with
Android’s best-in-class speech technology through your
vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your Android powered smartphone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or
higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factoryprovided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto icon
that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to
begin Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel, or press and hold the “Microphone” icon
within Android Auto, to activate Android’s VR, which
recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Apple CarPlay
• Maps
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
• Music
• Phone
• Text Messages
• Additional Apps
10
574 MULTIMEDIA
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Android Auto
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
Additional Information
© 2017 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877855-8400(24 hours a day 7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or call: 1-800465-2001(English) or 1-800-387-9983(French)
SiriusXM Guardian services support:
• U.S. residents call:1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents call:1-877-324-9091
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
575
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged, (e.g., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or
have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching
the disc.
10
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .581
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center. . . . . . . . . . .579
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands. . . . . . . . . .579
11
578 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 579
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247-9753
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
11
580 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.
Service Contract
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 581
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.
11
582 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
INDEX
12
584 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . . .292
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Adjust
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222, 226
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . .238, 426
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Air Bag Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165, 222, 267
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter). . . . . .438
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118, 441
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452, 494
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Audio Systems (Radio). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89, 90
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC). . . . . . . . . . . .111
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458, 497
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457, 458
INDEX 585
.497
.457
.138
.138
.497
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382, 386
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269, 382, 386
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167, 435
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Key Fob Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Keyless Key Fob Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Brake Control System, Electronic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456, 488
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456, 497
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359, 361
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365, 421
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266, 493
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Cargo Compartment
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Cargo Tie-Downs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Car Washes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398, 458
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet)
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12
586 INDEX
Chart, Tire Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .177
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Center Seat LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257, 259
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .255
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .247
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .244
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Using The Top Tether Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Climate Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Coat Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . . .529
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap). . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451, 454
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . .452, 494, 495
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Cruise Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174, 175, 176
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Daytime Running Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 95
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Defroster, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
INDEX 587
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Door Ajar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168, 169
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168, 169
Door Locks
Key Fob Emergency Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 68
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System). . . . . . . . .530
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . . .138
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . .289
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . . .167
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398, 399, 458
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Emission Control System Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .177
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266, 493
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436, 494, 495
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436, 494
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Engine Oil Viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . .238, 426
12
588 INDEX
Ethanol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266, 493
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266, 448
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 386
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 269, 382, 386
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118, 441
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438, 495
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 174, 269, 385
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 96
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Fluid Capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Fluid Leaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Fluids And Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 97, 387
Fog Light Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Forward Collision Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Front Position Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490, 495
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . .
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Reformulated . .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . .
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.365
.490
.490
.490
.486
.369
INDEX 589
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Hazard Warning Flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Headlights
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . . .94
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 97
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 96
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 96
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89, 92
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . .94, 95
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Hood Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Hook, Coat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89, 376
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152, 174
Instrument Cluster Display
Information Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Interior And Instrument Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
iPod/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398, 458
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . .41
Keyless Enter-N-Go
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
12
590 INDEX
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 98
LaneSense. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Latches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269, 386
Light Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165, 222, 267
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 98
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382, 386
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174, 175, 176
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 95
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269, 386
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97, 387
Front Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 384
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 97
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 95
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 97
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 96
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385, 386
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . .172, 199
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
INDEX 591
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 174, 269, 385
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . .167, 174
Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134, 369
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Load Shed
Battery Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Battery Saver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Electrical Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Intelligent Battery Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Low Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89, 90
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89, 92
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89, 91
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89, 376
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Monitor, Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . . . . . .178
Manual, Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Marker Lights, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Memory Seats And Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490, 495
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436, 495
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438, 495
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
12
592 INDEX
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436, 494
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437, 494
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Oil Filter, Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89, 91
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . .4, 581
Paint Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311, 321
Personalized Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . . .464
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Power Seats
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap). . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45, 51, 53
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Rear Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359, 361
Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311, 321
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
INDEX 593
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Recreational Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Reformulated Gasoline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Key Fob Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . . . .528
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . . .51, 521
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51, 521
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Schedule, Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . .
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . .
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . .
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . .
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.266
.269
.581
.266
.458
.265
.429
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.212
.218
.218
.209
.207
.211
.217
.216
.218
.206
.484
.206
12
594 INDEX
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206, 266
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .212
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206, 207, 209
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 73, 74
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 68, 70, 73
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 74
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 68, 70
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 68, 70
Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Sentry Key
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 174, 269, 385
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475, 476, 477
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
INDEX 595
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . .289, 292
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48, 274
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .528
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Sunglasses Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . . .224
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . .111
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Tire And Loading Information Placard. . . . . . . . . . . .464
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269, 467, 475, 480
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398, 458
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467, 475
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398, 399, 458
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464, 465
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . .158, 199
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458, 467
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475, 476, 477
12
596 INDEX
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Tire Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372, 373
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Trailer Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 174, 385
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . .51, 521
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51, 521
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Umbrella Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . . .529
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369, 465
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . .170
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
INDEX 597
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101, 434
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Wiper Blade Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Wipers, Intermittent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
12
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
18RUPHEV-126-AA
©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
First Edition
Printed in the U.S.A.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising